1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
42 % for customized page headers/footers
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
45 % change header rule width
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
54 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
55 \use_default_options false
60 \maintain_unincluded_children false
62 \language_package default
67 \font_typewriter default
69 \font_default_family default
70 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \default_output_format default
78 \bibtex_command bibtex
79 \index_command default
83 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
84 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
88 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
89 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
90 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
95 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
96 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
99 \use_package amsmath 1
100 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package cancel 0
103 \use_package mathdots 1
104 \use_package mathtools 0
105 \use_package mhchem 1
106 \use_package stackrel 0
107 \use_package stmaryrd 0
108 \use_package undertilde 0
110 \cite_engine_type default
114 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation indent
136 \paragraph_indentation default
137 \quotes_language english
140 \paperpagestyle default
141 \tracking_changes false
142 \output_changes false
159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
161 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
162 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
163 \begin_inset CommandInset href
165 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
176 \begin_inset Newline newline
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Note Note
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
188 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
194 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
219 \begin_layout Standard
220 LyX is a document preparation system.
221 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
222 scripts, publishable books, business
223 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
224 It is unlike most other
225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
232 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
234 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
250 pt type, left justified, 5
251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
259 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
263 \begin_layout Standard
264 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
269 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
273 \begin_layout Standard
278 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
279 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
280 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
281 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
287 manual describes that, too.
290 \begin_layout Section
294 \begin_layout Standard
295 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
297 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
298 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
302 \begin_layout Standard
303 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
304 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
305 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
307 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
308 only a vertical scrollbar.
309 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
310 The first case is large images.
311 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
312 image and use the option
318 LaTeX and LyX options
321 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
323 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
324 this doesn't work for equations yet.
327 \begin_layout Standard
328 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
336 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
343 \begin_layout Section
347 \begin_layout Standard
348 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
349 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
350 Just select the manual you want to read from the
357 \begin_layout Section
359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
361 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
368 \begin_layout Standard
369 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
371 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
375 \begin_inset Index idx
378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
384 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
385 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
386 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
388 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
389 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
394 \begin_inset space \space{}
397 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
398 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
400 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
404 \begin_inset Index idx
407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
408 Reconfiguration of LyX
413 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
416 \begin_layout Section
418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
420 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
427 \begin_layout Standard
428 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
429 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
431 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
432 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
436 \begin_layout Standard
437 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
439 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
440 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
443 \begin_layout Standard
444 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
445 you can view from the menu
447 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
466 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
467 reconfigure LyX (menu
469 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
473 \begin_inset Note Note
476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
477 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
485 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
486 More about TeX Code is described in section
491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
493 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
497 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
504 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
514 \begin_inset Index idx
517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
518 Reconfiguration of LyX
523 See section 5.1 of the
527 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
530 \begin_layout Chapter
534 \begin_layout Section
535 Basic File Operations
536 \begin_inset Index idx
539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
548 \begin_layout Standard
553 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
554 in addition to some more advanced operations:
557 \begin_layout Itemize
569 \begin_layout Itemize
583 \begin_layout Itemize
595 \begin_layout Itemize
601 \begin_layout Itemize
613 \begin_layout Itemize
623 \begin_layout Itemize
637 \begin_layout Itemize
647 \begin_layout Itemize
653 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
665 arg "dialog-show print"
671 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \begin_layout Standard
678 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
679 a few minor differences.
682 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
693 command lists the available templates.
694 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
695 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
696 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
704 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
711 \begin_layout Standard
712 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
744 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
745 space is just that — a big, blank space.
753 \begin_layout Standard
774 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
779 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
781 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
799 will reload the document from disk.
800 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
801 and want to restore it to the last save.
810 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
811 them as your changes.
814 \begin_layout Section
815 Basic Editing Features
816 \begin_inset Index idx
819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
828 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
835 \begin_layout Standard
836 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
837 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
838 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
839 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
841 We will start with cut and paste.
844 \begin_layout Standard
845 As you might expect, the
849 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
850 various other editing features.
851 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
855 \begin_layout Itemize
869 \begin_layout Itemize
883 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_layout Itemize
907 \begin_layout Itemize
917 \begin_layout Itemize
933 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
939 \begin_layout Standard
940 The first three are self-explanatory.
942 \begin_inset Index idx
945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
951 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
960 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
963 \begin_layout Standard
966 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
971 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
986 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
988 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
997 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
998 will start a new paragraph.
1001 \begin_layout Standard
1002 \begin_inset Index idx
1005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1012 \begin_inset Index idx
1015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1023 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_inset space ~
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1052 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1064 \begin_inset space ~
1069 button to skip the current word.
1073 \begin_inset space ~
1078 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1082 \begin_inset space ~
1087 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1089 If the toggle is set, searching for
1090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1101 will not match the word
1102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1116 Match whole words only
1118 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1147 LyX offers also an advanced
1150 \begin_inset space ~
1154 \begin_inset space ~
1159 feature that is described in sec.
1160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1166 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1173 \begin_layout Standard
1174 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1175 \begin_inset space \space{}
1179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1187 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1189 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1194 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1201 \begin_layout Standard
1202 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1205 arg "inset-select-all"
1211 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1214 selects the whole document.
1217 \begin_layout Section
1219 \begin_inset Index idx
1222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1229 \begin_inset Index idx
1232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1241 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1248 \begin_layout Standard
1249 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1250 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1253 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1256 or the toolbar button
1262 to undo some mistake.
1263 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1268 or the toolbar button
1275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1282 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1286 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1289 \begin_layout Standard
1290 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1299 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1300 This is a consequence of the 100
1301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1304 step undo limit mentioned above.
1307 \begin_layout Standard
1316 work on almost everything in LyX.
1317 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1321 \begin_layout Section
1323 \begin_inset Index idx
1326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1335 \begin_layout Standard
1336 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1339 \begin_layout Enumerate
1344 \begin_layout Itemize
1349 once anywhere in the edit window.
1350 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1354 \begin_layout Enumerate
1359 \begin_layout Itemize
1365 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1368 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1371 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1374 \begin_layout Itemize
1375 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1377 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1384 \begin_layout Enumerate
1385 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1389 \begin_layout Standard
1390 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1391 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1395 \begin_layout Section
1397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1399 name "sec:Navigating"
1404 \begin_inset Index idx
1407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1416 \begin_layout Standard
1417 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1420 \begin_layout Itemize
1425 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1426 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1429 \begin_layout Itemize
1430 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1432 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1434 \begin_inset space ~
1439 or by the toolbar button
1442 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1448 \begin_layout Itemize
1449 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1451 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1454 and use the same menu to return to them.
1455 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1458 \begin_layout Standard
1462 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1467 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1468 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1470 \begin_inset space ~
1475 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1476 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1477 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1478 your last editing position.
1481 \begin_layout Standard
1486 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1489 \begin_layout Subsection
1491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1493 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1500 \begin_layout Standard
1501 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1502 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1503 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1511 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1515 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1522 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1527 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1533 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1534 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1535 dialog and to modify the citation.
1538 \begin_layout Standard
1539 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1541 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1542 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1550 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1553 \begin_layout Standard
1554 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1555 you further to control the display.
1560 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1561 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1567 option keeps it in the current view state.
1568 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1569 \begin_inset space ~
1572 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1573 \begin_inset space ~
1576 3, the subsections of sections
1577 \begin_inset space ~
1580 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1585 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1586 \begin_inset space ~
1590 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1600 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1603 \begin_layout Standard
1605 \begin_inset space \space{}
1609 \begin_inset Graphics
1610 filename ../images/reload.png
1615 \begin_inset space ~
1618 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1619 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1622 \begin_inset space \space{}
1626 \begin_inset Graphics
1627 filename ../images/down.png
1629 groupId toolbarbuttons
1634 \begin_inset space ~
1638 \begin_inset space \space{}
1642 \begin_inset Graphics
1643 filename ../images/up.png
1645 groupId toolbarbuttons
1650 \begin_inset space ~
1653 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1654 So, for example, you can move section
1655 \begin_inset space ~
1659 \begin_inset space ~
1662 2.4 or after section
1663 \begin_inset space ~
1667 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1669 \begin_inset Graphics
1670 filename ../images/promote.png
1672 groupId toolbarbuttons
1677 \begin_inset Graphics
1678 filename ../images/demote.png
1680 groupId toolbarbuttons
1684 (or the corresponding key bindings
1692 ) you can change the level of sections.
1693 So you can for example make section
1694 \begin_inset space ~
1698 \begin_inset space ~
1702 \begin_inset space ~
1708 \begin_layout Section
1709 Input/Word Completion
1710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1712 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1717 \begin_inset Index idx
1720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1727 \begin_inset Index idx
1730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1761 \begin_layout Standard
1762 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1764 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1765 is used to propose completions.
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1771 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1776 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1783 \begin_inset space ~
1787 \begin_inset space ~
1792 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
1796 \begin_inset space ~
1801 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1802 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1806 \begin_inset space ~
1812 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1813 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
1818 are completions available.
1823 key to accept a proposed completion.
1824 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1825 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1826 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
1833 \begin_layout Standard
1834 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
1835 ing options for text.
1836 The special math option
1840 enables characters to be composed.
1841 If, for example, you want to insert the character
1842 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
1845 , you can then input the characters
1846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1857 to a formula to get it.
1858 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
1859 of the math toolbar.
1860 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
1864 that is in LyX's installation folder.
1865 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
1874 \begin_layout Section
1876 \begin_inset Index idx
1879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1886 \begin_inset Index idx
1889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1918 \begin_inset Index idx
1921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1952 \begin_layout Standard
1953 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
1966 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
1968 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1972 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1979 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
1986 \begin_layout Standard
1990 \begin_inset space ~
1998 \begin_inset space ~
2019 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2023 \begin_layout Labeling
2024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2028 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2029 LatexCommand nomenclature
2031 description "Tabulator key"
2037 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2038 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2039 \begin_inset space ~
2043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2045 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2052 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2056 , especially section
2057 \begin_inset space ~
2061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2063 reference "sub:Lists"
2069 If you are still confused, look in the
2074 \begin_inset Newline newline
2081 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2082 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2086 \begin_layout Labeling
2087 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2091 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2092 LatexCommand nomenclature
2094 description "Escape key"
2101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2108 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2109 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2112 \begin_layout Labeling
2113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2119 \begin_inset space ~
2123 \begin_inset space ~
2130 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2131 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2135 \begin_layout Standard
2136 There are three modifier keys:
2139 \begin_layout Labeling
2140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2158 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2159 LatexCommand nomenclature
2161 description "Control key"
2165 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2166 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2170 \begin_layout Itemize
2179 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2182 \begin_layout Itemize
2191 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2194 \begin_layout Itemize
2203 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2207 \begin_layout Labeling
2208 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2226 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2227 LatexCommand nomenclature
2229 description "Shift key"
2233 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2234 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2237 \begin_layout Labeling
2238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2256 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2257 LatexCommand nomenclature
2259 description "Alt or Meta key"
2263 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2264 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2265 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2271 \begin_inset Newline newline
2274 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2276 menu accelerator keys
2279 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2280 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2284 \begin_layout Standard
2285 For example, the sequence
2286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2292 \begin_inset space ~
2296 \begin_inset space ~
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2329 \begin_inset space ~
2335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2345 \begin_layout Standard
2350 manual lists all other things bound to the
2358 \begin_layout Standard
2359 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2360 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2361 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2362 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2363 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2364 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2365 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2367 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2383 followed by a capital
2390 \begin_layout Chapter
2392 \begin_inset Index idx
2395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2404 \begin_layout Section
2406 \begin_inset Index idx
2409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2418 \begin_layout Subsection
2422 \begin_layout Standard
2423 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2424 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2425 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2426 numbering schemes, and so on.
2427 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2428 and format the title of your document differently.
2431 \begin_layout Standard
2436 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2437 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2438 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2439 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2440 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2443 \begin_layout Subsection
2445 \begin_inset Index idx
2448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2457 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2464 \begin_layout Standard
2465 You can select a class using the
2467 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2468 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2472 \begin_inset Index idx
2475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2482 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2490 \begin_layout Standard
2491 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2495 \begin_layout Description
2496 Article for basic articles
2499 \begin_layout Description
2500 Report for basic reports
2503 \begin_layout Description
2504 Book for writing a book
2507 \begin_layout Description
2508 Letter for US-style letters
2511 \begin_layout Standard
2512 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2513 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2514 will include many of these.
2515 Here are some of the classes.
2516 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2518 Special Document Classes
2527 \begin_layout Description
2528 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2531 \begin_layout Description
2532 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2536 \begin_layout Description
2537 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2541 \begin_layout Description
2542 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2543 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2544 There are three article layouts available.
2545 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2546 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2547 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2548 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2553 sequential numbering
2554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2557 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2558 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2559 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2560 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2563 \begin_layout Description
2564 Beamer Layout for presentations
2567 \begin_layout Description
2568 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2569 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2573 \begin_layout Description
2574 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2577 \begin_layout Description
2579 \begin_inset space ~
2582 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2585 \begin_layout Description
2586 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2589 \begin_layout Description
2590 Foils Used to make transparencies
2593 \begin_layout Description
2594 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2595 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2599 \begin_layout Description
2600 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2601 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2604 \begin_layout Description
2605 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2608 \begin_layout Description
2609 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2612 \begin_layout Description
2613 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2614 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2615 (Is used by this document.)
2618 \begin_layout Description
2619 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2622 \begin_layout Description
2623 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2626 \begin_layout Description
2631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2638 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2639 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2641 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2644 \begin_layout Description
2645 Slides Used to make transparencies
2648 \begin_layout Description
2650 \begin_inset space ~
2653 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2654 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2657 \begin_layout Description
2658 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2661 \begin_layout Standard
2662 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2664 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2670 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2671 of the document classes.
2674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2678 \begin_layout Standard
2679 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2681 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2682 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2684 \begin_inset Index idx
2687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2704 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2705 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2707 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2710 \begin_layout Standard
2712 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2713 and some of them, like
2717 , are highly specialized.
2718 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2719 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2721 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2722 by some document class.
2723 There are just too many of them.
2724 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2727 \begin_layout Standard
2728 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2736 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2737 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2738 document class for a new file.
2739 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2744 Installing new LaTeX files
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2752 manual for information on how to install them.
2753 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2759 \begin_layout Standard
2760 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2761 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2763 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2764 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2765 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2767 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2771 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
2777 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2789 \begin_inset Index idx
2792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2801 \begin_layout Standard
2802 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
2803 chosen document class.
2804 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
2805 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
2812 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2816 \begin_inset Index idx
2819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2826 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
2830 \begin_layout Standard
2831 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
2832 always installed by default.
2833 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
2834 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
2835 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
2836 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
2837 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
2838 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
2839 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
2842 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2846 \begin_inset Index idx
2849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2850 Reconfiguration of LyX
2856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2859 Installing new LaTeX files
2860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2867 manual for more information on installing required packages.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2871 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
2874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2879 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
2880 LyX will advise you about these things.
2888 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2892 name "sub:Local-Layout"
2897 \begin_inset Index idx
2900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2901 Document ! Local Layout
2909 \begin_layout Standard
2910 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
2911 used in a variety of different documents.
2912 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
2913 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
2914 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
2915 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
2916 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
2917 What you want is LyX's
2918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2934 manual for information on how to use it.
2937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2941 \begin_layout Standard
2942 Each class has a default set of options.
2943 Here's a quick table describing them:
2946 \begin_layout Standard
2947 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
2953 \begin_layout Standard
2955 \begin_inset Tabular
2956 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
2957 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
2958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2960 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2961 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2962 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 \begin_layout Standard
3417 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3423 \begin_layout Standard
3424 You're probably also wondering what
3425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3429 \begin_inset space ~
3433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3437 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3438 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3443 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3448 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3458 headings, there are also
3466 headings, and so on.
3467 We will describe these headings fully in section
3468 \begin_inset space ~
3472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3474 reference "sub:Headings"
3481 \begin_layout Subsection
3483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3485 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3490 \begin_inset Index idx
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3502 \begin_inset Index idx
3505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 \begin_layout Standard
3515 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3517 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3524 \begin_inset space ~
3532 \begin_inset space ~
3537 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3539 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3540 to use for your document.
3541 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3545 \begin_layout Standard
3549 \begin_inset space ~
3556 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3562 \begin_inset space ~
3567 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3568 You can choose between the following five options:
3571 \begin_layout Labeling
3572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3577 Use default page style of current class.
3580 \begin_layout Labeling
3581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3586 No page numbers or headings.
3589 \begin_layout Labeling
3590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3598 \begin_layout Labeling
3599 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3604 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3605 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3606 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3609 \begin_layout Labeling
3610 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3615 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3616 have the LaTeX-package
3621 \begin_inset Index idx
3624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3631 How they are defined is explained in section
3632 \begin_inset space ~
3636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3638 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3645 \begin_layout Standard
3646 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3647 \begin_inset space ~
3651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3653 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3660 \begin_layout Subsection
3661 Paper Size and Orientation
3662 \begin_inset Index idx
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3666 Document ! Paper size
3672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3674 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3681 \begin_layout Standard
3682 You can find the following options in the menu
3685 \begin_inset space ~
3692 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3698 \begin_inset Index idx
3701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3710 \begin_layout Labeling
3711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3715 \begin_inset space ~
3720 What size paper to print on.
3725 \begin_layout Itemize
3731 \begin_layout Itemize
3737 \begin_layout Itemize
3743 \begin_layout Itemize
3749 \begin_layout Itemize
3752 US letter, US legal, US executive
3755 \begin_layout Itemize
3761 \begin_layout Itemize
3768 \begin_layout Labeling
3769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3774 To choose whether to output as
3785 \begin_layout Labeling
3786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3790 \begin_inset space ~
3795 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3796 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3799 \begin_layout Subsection
3801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3808 \begin_inset Index idx
3811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3818 \begin_inset Index idx
3821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3830 \begin_layout Standard
3831 Paper margins are set in the menu
3833 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3837 \begin_inset Index idx
3840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3849 \begin_layout Standard
3850 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
3851 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
3852 the paper format and the font size into account.
3855 \begin_layout Subsection
3859 \begin_layout Standard
3860 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
3865 That includes the paragraph environments.
3866 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3867 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3868 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
3869 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3878 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3880 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3881 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3882 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3885 \begin_layout Section
3886 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
3887 \begin_inset Index idx
3890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3891 Paragraph ! Indentation
3899 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3903 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3910 \begin_layout Standard
3911 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3912 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3915 \begin_layout Standard
3916 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3917 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3918 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
3919 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
3923 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
3929 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
3930 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
3931 language than English.
3932 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
3936 \begin_layout Standard
3937 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
3938 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
3940 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
3941 LyX takes care of that.
3942 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
3944 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
3945 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
3946 of a page, and so on.
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
3956 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
3957 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
3961 these pre-coded spacings.
3962 We will explain more later.
3965 \begin_layout Subsection
3966 Paragraph Separation
3967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3969 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3974 \begin_inset Index idx
3977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3978 Paragraph ! Separation
3986 \begin_layout Standard
3994 \begin_inset space ~
4002 \begin_inset space ~
4009 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4013 \begin_inset Index idx
4016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4022 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4025 \begin_layout Subsection
4029 \begin_layout Standard
4030 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4033 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4035 \begin_inset space ~
4040 dialog and toggle the
4043 \begin_inset space ~
4048 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4051 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4055 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4056 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4060 \begin_layout Standard
4061 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4062 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4065 \begin_layout Subsection
4067 \begin_inset Index idx
4070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4071 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4079 \begin_layout Standard
4082 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4086 \begin_inset Index idx
4089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4098 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4102 \begin_inset space ~
4111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4112 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4117 \begin_inset Index idx
4120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4121 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4126 installed to use this feature.
4131 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4133 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4135 \begin_inset space ~
4140 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4141 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4144 \begin_layout Section
4145 Paragraph Environments
4146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4148 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4153 \begin_inset Index idx
4156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4157 Paragraph ! Environments
4163 \begin_inset Index idx
4166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4167 Paragraph environments|(
4175 \begin_layout Subsection
4179 \begin_layout Standard
4180 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4183 \begin_layout Standard
4202 \begin_inset Newline newline
4205 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4206 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4207 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4216 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4219 \begin_layout Standard
4220 A paragraph environment is simply a
4221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4228 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4229 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4230 scheme, labels, and so on.
4231 Additionally, you can
4232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4239 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4240 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4241 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4242 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4244 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4246 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4249 \begin_layout Standard
4250 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4251 \begin_inset Graphics
4252 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4258 at the left end of the toolbar.
4259 LyX will change the environment of the
4263 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4264 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4265 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4269 \begin_layout Standard
4278 create a new paragraph using the
4282 paragraph environment.
4284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4291 because if you are in one of these environments:
4294 \begin_layout Itemize
4300 \begin_layout Itemize
4306 \begin_layout Itemize
4312 \begin_layout Itemize
4318 \begin_layout Itemize
4324 \begin_layout Itemize
4330 \begin_layout Itemize
4336 \begin_layout Standard
4337 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4341 , rather than resetting it to
4346 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4347 \begin_inset space ~
4351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4353 reference "sec:Nesting"
4360 \begin_layout Subsection
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 The default paragraph environment is
4370 It creates a plain paragraph.
4371 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4372 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4373 this manual) are in the
4380 \begin_layout Standard
4381 You can nest a paragraph using the
4385 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4393 \begin_layout Subsection
4395 \begin_inset Index idx
4398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 \begin_layout Standard
4408 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4417 for thanks or contact information.
4418 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4419 page along with today's date.
4420 For other types of documents, the title
4421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4428 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4432 \begin_layout Standard
4433 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4447 Here's how you use them:
4450 \begin_layout Itemize
4451 Put the title of your document in the
4458 \begin_layout Itemize
4459 Put the author name in the
4466 \begin_layout Itemize
4467 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4468 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4474 Note that using this environment is optional.
4475 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4476 If you don't want a date, use the option
4478 Suppress default date on front page
4482 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4483 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4485 \begin_inset space ~
4493 \begin_layout Standard
4494 You can use footnotes to insert
4495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4502 or contact information.
4505 \begin_layout Subsection
4507 \begin_inset Index idx
4510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4526 \begin_layout Standard
4527 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4528 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4533 \begin_inset Index idx
4536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4537 Section headings ! Numbered
4545 \begin_layout Standard
4546 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4550 \begin_layout Enumerate
4556 \begin_layout Enumerate
4562 \begin_layout Enumerate
4568 \begin_layout Enumerate
4574 \begin_layout Enumerate
4580 \begin_layout Enumerate
4586 \begin_layout Enumerate
4592 \begin_layout Standard
4593 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4594 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4595 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4598 \begin_layout Standard
4599 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4600 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4601 You group the book into chapters.
4602 LyX does a similar grouping:
4605 \begin_layout Itemize
4610 is divided into either
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4633 \begin_layout Itemize
4645 \begin_layout Itemize
4657 \begin_layout Itemize
4669 \begin_layout Itemize
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4690 Not all document types use the
4694 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4699 is the top-level heading.
4707 \begin_layout Standard
4712 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4713 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4715 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4727 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4729 \begin_inset Index idx
4732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4733 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4741 \begin_layout Standard
4742 The unnumbered section headings have a
4743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4750 at the end of their name.
4751 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4752 the table of contents, see section
4753 \begin_inset space ~
4757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4767 Changing the Numbering
4768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4770 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
4777 \begin_layout Standard
4778 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4779 in the Table of Contents.
4780 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4782 Just as certain classes start with
4796 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4806 This is something you can change.
4809 \begin_layout Standard
4812 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4816 \begin_inset Index idx
4819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4828 \begin_inset space ~
4832 \begin_inset space ~
4837 you will see two counters.
4842 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
4844 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
4848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4849 Short Titles of Headings
4850 \begin_inset Index idx
4853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4854 Section headings ! Short titles
4860 \begin_inset Argument 1
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4872 name "sec:Short-Titles"
4879 \begin_layout Standard
4880 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
4881 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
4882 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
4883 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
4886 \begin_layout Standard
4887 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
4888 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
4889 avoiding the problem mentioned.
4890 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
4893 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4895 \begin_inset space ~
4901 This will insert a box labeled
4902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4906 \begin_inset space ~
4910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4913 which you can use to enter the short title text.
4914 This also works for captions inside floats.
4915 There can only be one short title per title.
4918 \begin_layout Standard
4919 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
4922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4926 \begin_layout Standard
4927 The following information applies to all section headings:
4930 \begin_layout Itemize
4931 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4939 You can only use inline math in these environments.
4942 \begin_layout Itemize
4943 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
4946 \begin_layout Subsection
4947 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
4950 \begin_layout Standard
4951 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
4965 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
4966 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
4967 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
4968 the text they contain.
4969 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
4977 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
4980 \begin_layout Standard
4981 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
4990 when you start a new paragraph.
4991 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
4995 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
4996 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
4997 have to change back to the
5001 environment yourself.
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5021 \begin_inset Index idx
5024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5033 \begin_layout Standard
5034 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5035 time for the differences.
5044 are identical except for one difference:
5048 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5057 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5060 \begin_layout Standard
5061 Here's an example of the
5074 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5076 See – no indentation!
5080 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5081 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5082 the other paragraph.
5085 \begin_layout Standard
5086 Here's another example, this time in the
5093 \begin_layout Quotation
5099 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5100 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5101 the first line, then
5105 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5109 you were quoting other text.
5112 \begin_layout Quotation
5113 Here's a new paragraph.
5114 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5115 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5118 \begin_layout Standard
5119 As the examples show,
5123 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5124 They should put quotes in the
5129 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5133 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5136 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5142 \begin_inset Index idx
5145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5154 \begin_inset Index idx
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5173 \begin_layout Standard
5178 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5184 \begin_inset Newline newline
5187 Which I did not rehearse!
5191 It could be much worse.
5192 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5194 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5195 indented a bit more than the first.
5196 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5202 \begin_inset Newline newline
5205 And make things look fine
5206 \begin_inset Newline newline
5212 arg "newline-insert newline"
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5223 does not indent both margins.
5224 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5225 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5232 arg "newline-insert newline"
5238 \begin_layout Subsection
5240 \begin_inset Index idx
5243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5259 \begin_layout Standard
5260 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5270 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5279 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5280 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5281 describing some general features of all four of them.
5284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5288 \begin_layout Standard
5289 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5291 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5300 reset the environment to
5304 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5305 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5306 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5310 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5314 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5321 \begin_layout Standard
5322 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5323 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5325 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5326 you read all of section
5327 \begin_inset space ~
5331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5333 reference "sec:Nesting"
5340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5346 \begin_inset Index idx
5349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5365 \begin_layout Standard
5366 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5370 paragraph environment.
5371 It has the following properties:
5374 \begin_layout Itemize
5375 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5379 \begin_layout Itemize
5380 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5383 \begin_layout Itemize
5384 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 The items can have any length.
5390 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5391 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5398 \begin_layout Itemize
5403 environment inside another
5407 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5419 \begin_layout Itemize
5421 \begin_inset space ~
5425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5427 reference "sec:Nesting"
5431 for a full explanation of nesting.
5435 \begin_layout Standard
5436 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5445 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5448 \begin_layout Standard
5449 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5450 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5453 \begin_layout Itemize
5454 The label for the first level
5458 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5462 \begin_layout Itemize
5463 The label for the second level is a dash.
5467 \begin_layout Itemize
5468 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5472 \begin_layout Itemize
5473 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5477 \begin_layout Itemize
5478 Back out to the third level.
5482 \begin_layout Itemize
5483 Back to the second level.
5487 \begin_layout Itemize
5488 Back to the outermost level.
5491 \begin_layout Standard
5492 These are the default labels for an
5497 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5499 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5502 dialog in the submenu
5507 \begin_inset Index idx
5510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5516 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5519 \begin_layout Standard
5520 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5521 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5523 \begin_inset space ~
5527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5529 reference "sec:Nesting"
5536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5542 \begin_inset Index idx
5545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5554 name "sec:Enumerate"
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5566 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5567 It has these properties:
5570 \begin_layout Enumerate
5571 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5575 \begin_layout Enumerate
5576 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5580 \begin_layout Enumerate
5581 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5584 \begin_layout Enumerate
5589 environment resets the counter to one.
5592 \begin_layout Enumerate
5605 \begin_layout Enumerate
5606 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5607 Items can have any length.
5610 \begin_layout Enumerate
5611 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5614 \begin_layout Enumerate
5615 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5618 \begin_layout Enumerate
5619 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5623 \begin_layout Standard
5632 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5633 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5640 \begin_layout Enumerate
5641 The first level of an
5645 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5649 \begin_layout Enumerate
5650 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5654 \begin_layout Enumerate
5655 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5659 \begin_layout Enumerate
5660 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5663 \begin_layout Enumerate
5664 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5669 \begin_layout Enumerate
5670 Back to the third level
5674 \begin_layout Enumerate
5675 Back to the second level.
5679 \begin_layout Enumerate
5680 Back to the outermost level.
5683 \begin_layout Standard
5684 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5688 environment, see section
5689 \begin_inset space ~
5693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5695 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5700 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5703 \begin_layout Standard
5704 There is more to nesting
5708 environments than we've stated here.
5709 You should read section
5710 \begin_inset space ~
5714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5716 reference "sec:Nesting"
5720 to learn more about nesting.
5723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5729 \begin_inset Index idx
5732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5741 \begin_layout Standard
5742 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5746 list has no fixed label.
5747 Instead, LyX uses the first
5748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5755 of the first line as the label.
5759 \begin_layout Description
5760 Example: This is an example of the
5767 \begin_layout Standard
5768 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5772 \begin_layout Standard
5774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5781 it is meant that the first usage of the
5785 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5787 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
5795 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
5800 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5801 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5803 \begin_inset space ~
5809 \begin_inset space ~
5813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5815 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
5819 for more information.) Here is an example:
5822 \begin_layout Description
5824 \begin_inset space ~
5827 Example: This one shows how to use a
5830 \begin_inset space ~
5842 \begin_layout Description
5843 Usage: You should use the
5847 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
5848 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
5850 It's not a good idea to use a
5854 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
5855 You're better off using
5867 paragraphs into them.
5870 \begin_layout Description
5871 Nesting: You can nest
5875 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
5879 \begin_layout Standard
5880 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
5881 them from the first line.
5884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5886 \begin_inset Index idx
5889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5898 \begin_layout Standard
5903 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
5906 \begin_layout Standard
5915 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
5917 Here are its properties:
5920 \begin_layout Labeling
5921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5923 \begin_inset space ~
5926 labels LyX uses the first
5927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5934 of each line as the item label.
5939 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
5940 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
5941 space as described above.
5944 \begin_layout Labeling
5945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5946 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
5947 the body of the item text.
5948 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
5949 label width plus a little extra space.
5953 \begin_layout Labeling
5954 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5956 \begin_inset space ~
5959 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
5961 If the label width is larger, the label
5962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5969 into the first line.
5970 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
5971 margin of the rest of the item text.
5974 \begin_layout Labeling
5975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5977 \begin_inset space ~
5980 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
5985 environment has the same left margin.
5986 \begin_inset Newline newline
5989 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
5992 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5994 \begin_inset space ~
5999 dialog (toolbar button
6002 arg "layout-paragraph"
6009 \begin_inset space ~
6014 determines the default label width.
6015 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6024 multiple times instead.
6025 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6034 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6037 \begin_inset space ~
6042 every time you alter a label in a
6047 \begin_inset Newline newline
6050 The predefined default width is the length of
6051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6059 \begin_inset space ~
6065 \begin_layout Standard
6070 list the same way as the
6074 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6080 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6084 \begin_layout Standard
6089 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6090 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6092 \begin_inset space ~
6096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6098 reference "sec:Nesting"
6102 to learn about nesting.
6105 \begin_layout Standard
6106 There is yet another feature of the
6110 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6112 You can use additional
6116 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6121 are documented in section
6122 \begin_inset space ~
6126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6128 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6133 Here are some examples:
6136 \begin_layout Labeling
6137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6138 Left The default for
6145 \begin_layout Labeling
6146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6147 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6154 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6157 \begin_layout Labeling
6158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6159 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6163 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6170 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6173 \begin_layout Subsection
6175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6177 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6182 \begin_inset Index idx
6185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6194 \begin_layout Standard
6195 The features described in this section require that the module
6197 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6199 is loaded in the document settings.
6200 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6205 \begin_inset Index idx
6208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6209 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6217 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6218 Custom Enumerate Lists
6219 \begin_inset Index idx
6222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6223 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6231 \begin_layout Standard
6233 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6236 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6239 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6240 There you add the command
6243 \begin_layout Standard
6251 \begin_layout Standard
6252 in TeX Code (shortcut
6262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6263 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6270 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6283 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6290 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6291 For capital Roman numerals replace
6303 in the command above.
6304 For Arabic numerals use
6312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6319 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6334 \begin_layout Standard
6336 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6344 You can only number 26
6345 \begin_inset space ~
6348 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6356 \begin_layout Standard
6357 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6358 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6361 \begin_layout Standard
6362 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6365 \begin_layout Enumerate
6366 \begin_inset Argument 1
6369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6395 \begin_layout Enumerate
6396 \begin_inset Argument 1
6399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6422 \begin_layout Enumerate
6427 \begin_layout Enumerate
6428 \begin_inset Argument 1
6431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6455 \begin_layout Enumerate
6456 \begin_inset Argument 1
6459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6485 \begin_layout Standard
6486 For this list these commands were used:
6489 \begin_layout Standard
6500 \begin_inset Newline newline
6508 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 \begin_inset Newline newline
6526 \begin_layout Standard
6533 makes the label emphasized and
6542 \begin_layout Standard
6543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6551 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6552 lists until you change the definition.
6560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6562 \begin_inset Index idx
6565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6566 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6574 \begin_layout Standard
6575 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6578 \begin_layout Enumerate
6579 \begin_inset Argument 1
6582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6601 \begin_inset Note Note
6604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6605 goes back to default numbering
6613 \begin_layout Enumerate
6617 \begin_layout Standard
6621 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6625 \begin_layout Standard
6626 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6631 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6632 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6635 \begin_layout Standard
6636 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6644 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6652 \begin_layout Standard
6653 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6655 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6656 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6657 of a normal enumeration.
6658 There, insert the command
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6667 \begin_layout Standard
6672 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6676 \begin_layout Enumerate
6680 \begin_layout Enumerate
6684 \begin_layout Standard
6685 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6688 \begin_layout Enumerate
6689 \begin_inset Argument 1
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6708 This enumeration starts at 4
6711 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6713 \begin_inset Index idx
6716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6725 \begin_layout Standard
6726 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6728 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6731 \begin_layout Itemize
6735 \begin_layout Itemize
6736 with standard spacing
6739 \begin_layout Standard
6740 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6742 Add there the command
6746 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6749 \begin_layout Itemize
6750 \begin_inset Argument 1
6753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6772 \begin_layout Itemize
6776 \begin_layout Itemize
6780 \begin_layout Standard
6781 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6787 \begin_inset Index idx
6790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6791 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6797 For more information see its documentation,
6798 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6808 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
6810 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
6811 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
6812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6815 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
6818 \begin_layout Enumerate
6819 \begin_inset Argument 1
6822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6830 parindent, labelsep=2cm
6843 \begin_layout Enumerate
6844 with negative indentation
6847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6848 Further Customization
6849 \begin_inset Index idx
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 Lists ! Customization
6861 \begin_layout Standard
6862 You can also change the style of description lists.
6866 \begin_layout Standard
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6873 changes the description label font, the command
6876 \begin_layout Standard
6882 \begin_layout Standard
6883 sets the list style.
6886 \begin_layout Standard
6887 An example where the command
6890 \begin_layout Standard
6895 itshape, style=nextline
6898 \begin_layout Standard
6902 \begin_layout Description
6904 \begin_inset space ~
6908 \begin_inset Argument 1
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6917 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
6919 itshape, style=nextline
6929 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
6930 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
6934 \begin_layout Description
6936 \begin_inset space ~
6939 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
6940 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
6941 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
6944 \begin_layout Standard
6945 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
6951 \begin_inset Index idx
6954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6955 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6961 For more information see its documentation
6962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6971 \begin_layout Subsection
6973 \begin_inset Index idx
6976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6993 \begin_inset space ~
7001 \begin_layout Standard
7002 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7010 \begin_inset space ~
7016 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7017 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7018 In contrast, you can use the
7025 \begin_inset space ~
7030 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7031 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7035 \begin_layout Standard
7036 Of course, you're not limited to using
7043 \begin_inset space ~
7052 \begin_inset space ~
7057 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7058 some European academic papers.
7061 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7065 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7072 \begin_layout Standard
7077 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7078 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7082 \begin_inset space ~
7087 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7088 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7089 Here's an example of each:
7092 \begin_layout Right Address
7094 \begin_inset Newline newline
7098 \begin_inset Newline newline
7102 \begin_inset Newline newline
7105 When is it? What is today?
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7112 \begin_inset space ~
7118 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7119 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7120 Here's an example of the
7127 \begin_layout Address
7129 \begin_inset Newline newline
7132 Where do I send this
7133 \begin_inset Newline newline
7136 Your post office and country
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7140 As you can see, both
7147 \begin_inset space ~
7152 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7157 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7163 This makes sense, since
7171 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7172 Thus, you have to use
7179 arg "newline-insert newline"
7184 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7185 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7187 \begin_inset space ~
7191 \begin_inset space ~
7196 ) to start a new line in an
7203 \begin_inset space ~
7211 \begin_layout Subsection
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7217 or list of references.
7218 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7225 \begin_inset Index idx
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7237 \begin_layout Standard
7242 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7243 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7244 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7245 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7259 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7260 The book document classes ignores the
7264 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7268 in a letter document class.
7271 \begin_layout Standard
7276 environment does several things for you.
7277 First, it puts the centered label
7278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7286 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7288 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7289 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7290 the subsequent text.
7291 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7292 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7296 \begin_layout Standard
7297 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7301 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7302 The new paragraph will still be in the
7307 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7308 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7312 \begin_inset Float figure
7317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7319 \begin_inset Graphics
7320 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7328 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7333 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7355 We would love to demonstrate the
7359 environment, but since this document is in the
7360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7367 class, we can't do this.
7368 We inserted it therefore as figure
7369 \begin_inset space ~
7373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7375 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7380 If you have never heard of an
7381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7388 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7397 \begin_inset Index idx
7400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7409 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7416 \begin_layout Standard
7421 environment is used to list references.
7422 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7423 only use it at the end of the document.
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7436 When you first open a
7440 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7456 depending on the document class.
7457 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7458 Each paragraph of the
7462 environment is a bibliography entry.
7467 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7468 Each new paragraph is still in the
7475 \begin_layout Standard
7476 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7477 by using a BibTeX database.
7478 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7479 phy handling, have a look at section
7480 \begin_inset space ~
7484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7486 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7493 \begin_layout Subsection
7497 \begin_inset Index idx
7500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7501 Paragraph ! LyX code
7507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7516 \begin_layout Standard
7521 environment is another LyX extension.
7522 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7527 key as a fixed whitespace;
7531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_inset space ~
7548 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7553 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7554 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7557 arg "newline-insert newline"
7574 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7575 So, when you finish using the
7579 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7580 Also, you can nest the
7584 environment inside of others.
7587 \begin_layout Standard
7588 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7591 \begin_layout Itemize
7595 arg "newline-insert newline"
7598 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7603 \begin_inset space \space{}
7613 arg "newline-insert newline"
7619 \begin_layout Itemize
7623 arg "newline-insert newline"
7634 \begin_layout Itemize
7639 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7646 \begin_layout Itemize
7650 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7657 \begin_layout Itemize
7658 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7659 You must put at least one
7663 in any line you want blank.
7664 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7667 \begin_layout Itemize
7668 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7672 since that will insert
7677 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7680 arg "self-insert \""
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7690 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7694 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7698 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7702 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7706 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7707 printf("Hello World!
7712 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7716 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7721 This is just the standard
7722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7733 \begin_layout Standard
7738 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7739 rc-files, and so on.
7740 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7741 as if you used a typewriter.
7742 \begin_inset Index idx
7745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7746 Paragraph environments|)
7751 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7754 Program Code Listings
7759 \begin_inset space ~
7767 \begin_layout Section
7768 Nesting Environments
7769 \begin_inset Index idx
7772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7773 Nesting ! Environments
7779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7788 \begin_layout Subsection
7792 \begin_layout Standard
7793 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7795 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7797 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7799 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7811 \begin_layout Enumerate
7815 \begin_layout Enumerate
7820 \begin_layout Enumerate
7824 \begin_layout Enumerate
7829 \begin_layout Enumerate
7833 \begin_layout Standard
7834 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
7835 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
7837 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7839 \begin_inset space ~
7843 \begin_inset space ~
7851 \begin_inset space ~
7855 \begin_inset space ~
7860 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
7862 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
7865 arg "depth-increment"
7871 arg "depth-decrement"
7885 arg "depth-increment"
7891 arg "depth-decrement"
7895 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
7896 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
7900 \begin_layout Standard
7901 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
7902 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
7903 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
7904 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
7909 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
7911 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
7914 \begin_layout Subsection
7915 What You Can and Can't Nest
7918 \begin_layout Standard
7919 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
7920 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
7923 \begin_layout Standard
7924 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
7925 than a simple yes or no.
7926 There are three types of paragraph environments:
7929 \begin_layout Itemize
7930 Completely unnestable
7933 \begin_layout Itemize
7934 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
7938 \begin_layout Itemize
7939 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
7943 \begin_layout Standard
7944 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
7945 environments have them:
7948 \begin_layout Description
7949 Unnestable Can't nest them.
7950 Can't nest into them.
7954 \begin_layout Itemize
7960 \begin_layout Itemize
7966 \begin_layout Itemize
7972 \begin_layout Itemize
7978 \begin_layout Itemize
7985 \begin_layout Description
7987 \begin_inset space ~
7990 Nestable You can nest them.
7991 You can nest other things into them.
7995 \begin_layout Itemize
8001 \begin_layout Itemize
8007 \begin_layout Itemize
8013 \begin_layout Itemize
8019 \begin_layout Itemize
8025 \begin_layout Itemize
8031 \begin_layout Itemize
8037 \begin_layout Itemize
8044 \begin_layout Description
8045 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8046 You can't nest anything into them.
8050 \begin_layout Itemize
8056 \begin_layout Itemize
8062 \begin_layout Itemize
8068 \begin_layout Itemize
8074 \begin_layout Itemize
8080 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 \begin_layout Itemize
8092 \begin_layout Itemize
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 \begin_layout Itemize
8110 \begin_layout Itemize
8116 \begin_layout Itemize
8122 \begin_layout Itemize
8128 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 \begin_inset space ~
8138 \begin_layout Itemize
8145 \begin_layout Standard
8146 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8154 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8164 \begin_inset space ~
8167 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8168 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8169 nested section headings violate this.
8177 \begin_layout Subsection
8178 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8179 \begin_inset Index idx
8182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8183 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8191 \begin_layout Standard
8192 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8193 affected by nesting anyhow.
8197 \begin_layout Itemize
8201 \begin_layout Itemize
8205 \begin_layout Itemize
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8211 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8219 Figures and tables in
8223 are not affected by this.
8228 Have a look at section
8229 \begin_inset space ~
8233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8235 reference "sec:Floats"
8239 for more information about
8246 \begin_layout Standard
8247 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8248 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8252 \begin_layout Standard
8253 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8261 of its own, it behaves just like a
8262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8269 paragraph environment.
8270 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8275 Here's an example with a table:
8278 \begin_layout Enumerate
8283 \begin_layout Enumerate
8284 This is (a) and it's nested.
8288 \begin_layout Standard
8289 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8295 \begin_layout Standard
8297 \begin_inset Tabular
8298 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8299 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8385 \begin_layout Standard
8386 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8393 \begin_layout Enumerate
8395 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8399 \begin_layout Enumerate
8403 \begin_layout Standard
8404 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8407 \begin_layout Enumerate
8412 \begin_layout Enumerate
8413 This is (a) and it's nested.
8417 \begin_layout Standard
8418 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8424 \begin_layout Standard
8426 \begin_inset Tabular
8427 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8428 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8429 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8430 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8514 \begin_layout Standard
8515 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8521 \begin_layout Enumerate
8528 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8531 \begin_layout Enumerate
8535 \begin_layout Standard
8536 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8543 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8546 \begin_layout Enumerate
8551 \begin_layout Enumerate
8552 This is (a) and it's nested.
8555 \begin_layout Standard
8556 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8562 \begin_layout Standard
8564 \begin_inset Tabular
8565 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8566 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8567 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8653 \begin_layout Standard
8654 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8660 \begin_layout Enumerate
8662 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8669 \begin_layout Enumerate
8673 \begin_layout Standard
8674 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8680 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8681 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8685 \begin_layout Subsection
8686 Usage and General Features
8689 \begin_layout Standard
8690 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8699 is the innermost possible depth.
8700 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8703 \begin_layout Enumerate
8704 level #1 – outermost
8708 \begin_layout Enumerate
8713 \begin_layout Enumerate
8718 \begin_layout Enumerate
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Standard
8738 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8739 both of them in the example.
8740 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8750 For example, if we tried to nest another
8755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8762 , we would get errors.
8765 \begin_layout Subsection
8767 \begin_inset Index idx
8770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8779 \begin_layout Standard
8780 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8781 We have several examples of nested environments.
8782 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8787 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8790 \begin_layout Labeling
8791 \labelwidthstring MMM
8792 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8801 \begin_layout Labeling
8802 \labelwidthstring MMM
8803 #2-a This is level #2.
8804 We created it by using
8807 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8813 arg "depth-increment"
8820 \begin_layout Labeling
8821 \labelwidthstring MMM
8822 #3-a This is level #3.
8823 This time, we just enter
8830 arg "depth-increment"
8834 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
8838 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8844 arg "depth-increment"
8851 \begin_layout Standard
8856 environment, nested inside of
8857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8865 So, it's at level #4.
8866 We did this by entering
8869 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8875 arg "depth-increment"
8878 , then changing the paragraph environment to
8883 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8904 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
8907 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8913 \begin_layout Labeling
8914 \labelwidthstring MMM
8915 #4-a This is level #4.
8919 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8922 and changed the paragraph environment back to
8927 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
8931 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
8936 keep nesting things inside
8937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8948 \begin_layout Labeling
8949 \labelwidthstring MMM
8950 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
8955 \begin_layout Labeling
8956 \labelwidthstring MMM
8957 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
8958 and this is level #6.
8959 By now, you should know how we made these two.
8963 \begin_layout Labeling
8964 \labelwidthstring MMM
8965 #5-b Back to level #5.
8969 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8975 arg "depth-decrement"
8982 \begin_layout Labeling
8983 \labelwidthstring MMM
8987 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8993 arg "depth-decrement"
8996 , we're back at level #4.
9000 \begin_layout Labeling
9001 \labelwidthstring MMM
9002 #3-b Back to level #3.
9003 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9007 \begin_layout Labeling
9008 \labelwidthstring MMM
9009 #2-b Back to level #2.
9014 \begin_layout Labeling
9015 \labelwidthstring MMM
9016 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9017 After this sentence, we will enter
9021 and change the paragraph environment back to
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 We could have also used the
9045 environment in place of the
9050 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9054 Example 2: Inheritance
9057 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9058 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9061 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9070 arg "depth-increment"
9074 \begin_inset Newline newline
9077 which, we will change to the
9085 \begin_layout Enumerate
9090 environment, at level #2.
9093 \begin_layout Enumerate
9094 Notice how the nested
9098 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9102 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9106 \begin_layout Standard
9107 We ended this example by entering
9112 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9116 and reset the nesting depth by using
9119 arg "depth-decrement"
9125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9126 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9135 \begin_inset Argument 1
9138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9139 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9147 \begin_layout Enumerate
9148 This is level #1, in an
9152 paragraph environment.
9153 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9157 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9168 arg "depth-increment"
9172 Now, what happens if we nest an
9176 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9177 label be? An asterisk?
9181 \begin_layout Itemize
9191 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9192 So, its label is a bullet.
9193 (We got here by using
9196 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9202 arg "depth-increment"
9205 , then changing the environment to
9213 \begin_layout Itemize
9214 Here's level #4, produced using
9217 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9223 arg "depth-increment"
9227 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9232 \begin_layout Enumerate
9233 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9235 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9240 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9244 , because we are in the
9252 environment (that is, it is an
9267 \begin_layout Enumerate
9272 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9273 type of numbering does LyX use?
9276 \begin_layout Enumerate
9277 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9280 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9283 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9286 \begin_layout Enumerate
9290 arg "depth-decrement"
9293 to decrease the depth after the next
9296 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9305 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9309 \begin_layout Enumerate
9311 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9312 numeral as the label.Why?
9315 \begin_layout Enumerate
9316 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9325 Notice, however, that LyX
9329 reset the counter for the label.
9333 \begin_layout Enumerate
9337 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9343 arg "depth-decrement"
9346 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9347 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9348 into the twofold-nested
9356 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 The same thing happens if we do another
9360 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9366 arg "depth-decrement"
9369 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9372 \begin_layout Standard
9373 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9378 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9392 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9398 The same rule applies for the
9402 environment, as well.
9405 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9406 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9409 \begin_layout Enumerate
9410 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9411 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9412 the same detail with how we did it.
9421 \begin_layout Standard
9429 arg "depth-increment"
9436 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9437 the example in parentheses someplace.
9438 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9439 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9440 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9444 \begin_layout Enumerate
9449 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9454 Now we will add verse.
9455 \begin_inset Newline newline
9458 It will get much worse.
9459 \begin_inset Newline newline
9469 arg "depth-increment"
9480 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9481 \begin_inset Newline newline
9484 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9485 \begin_inset Newline newline
9491 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9504 \begin_layout Standard
9505 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9511 \begin_layout Standard
9513 \begin_inset Tabular
9514 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9515 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9516 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9517 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9606 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9616 arg "depth-increment"
9622 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9632 arg "depth-decrement"
9639 \begin_layout Enumerate
9644 : level #1) This is another item.
9645 Note that selecting a
9649 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9650 3 times to put the table inside the
9658 \begin_layout Quotation
9659 We're now ending the
9663 list and changing to
9668 We're still at level #1.
9669 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9670 The next set of paragraphs is a
9671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9678 We will nest both the
9685 \begin_inset space ~
9690 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9694 for the letter body.
9698 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9701 to preserve the depth.
9702 Remember that you need to use
9705 arg "newline-insert newline"
9708 to create multiple lines inside the
9715 \begin_inset space ~
9725 \begin_layout Right Address
9727 \begin_inset Newline newline
9730 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9731 \begin_inset Newline newline
9737 \begin_layout Address
9739 \begin_inset space ~
9745 \begin_layout Quotation
9746 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9750 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9751 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9752 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9753 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9754 as soon as possible.
9755 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9758 \begin_layout Quotation
9759 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9760 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9761 with your order, along with payment.
9764 \begin_layout Quotation
9765 We thank you again for your patience.
9768 \begin_layout Address
9770 \begin_inset Newline newline
9777 \begin_layout Quotation
9778 That ends that example!
9781 \begin_layout Standard
9782 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9783 just a few keystrokes.
9784 We could have easily nested an
9805 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9808 \begin_layout Section
9809 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9810 \begin_inset Index idx
9813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9822 \begin_layout Standard
9823 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
9824 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
9825 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
9826 be broken at the end of a line.
9827 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
9831 \begin_layout Subsection
9833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9835 name "sub:Protected-Space"
9840 \begin_inset Index idx
9843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9852 \begin_layout Standard
9853 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
9855 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
9859 Further documentation is given in section
9860 \begin_inset Newline newline
9864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9866 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9874 \begin_layout Standard
9875 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
9876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9890 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9899 A protected space is set with
9901 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9902 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9904 \begin_inset space ~
9912 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
9918 \begin_layout Subsection
9920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9922 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
9927 \begin_inset Index idx
9930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9931 Spacing ! Horizontal
9939 \begin_layout Standard
9940 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
9942 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9943 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9947 The length units are listed in Appendix
9948 \begin_inset space ~
9952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9954 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
9961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9965 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
9970 \begin_inset Index idx
9973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9982 \begin_layout Standard
9983 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
9984 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
9985 at the ends of sentences.
9986 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
9987 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
9988 followed by a period; see section
9989 \begin_inset space ~
9993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9995 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10000 To insert a normal space, select
10002 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10003 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10005 \begin_inset space ~
10013 arg "space-insert normal"
10019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10023 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10028 \begin_inset Index idx
10031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10040 \begin_layout Standard
10042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10049 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10058 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10059 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10060 inside abbreviations:
10063 \begin_layout Quote
10065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10069 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10072 \begin_layout Standard
10073 or between values and units.
10074 Compare for example this:
10075 \begin_inset Newline newline
10079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10083 \begin_inset Newline newline
10086 10 kg (normal space
10089 \begin_layout Standard
10090 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10092 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10093 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10095 \begin_inset space ~
10103 arg "space-insert thin"
10109 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10113 \begin_layout Standard
10114 You can also insert the following space types:
10117 \begin_layout Description
10119 \begin_inset space ~
10123 \begin_inset space ~
10126 space A line with a
10127 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10131 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10135 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10138 negative thin space between the arrows.
10141 \begin_layout Description
10143 \begin_inset space ~
10147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10151 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10155 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10159 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10163 \begin_inset space ~
10167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10170 em) space between the arrows.
10173 \begin_layout Description
10175 \begin_inset space ~
10179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10183 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10187 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10191 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10195 \begin_inset space ~
10199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10202 em) space between the arrows.
10205 \begin_layout Description
10207 \begin_inset space ~
10211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10215 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10219 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10223 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10227 \begin_inset space ~
10231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10234 em) space between the arrows.
10237 \begin_layout Description
10239 \begin_inset space ~
10243 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10247 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10252 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10259 cm space between the arrows.
10262 \begin_layout Standard
10264 \begin_inset space ~
10268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10270 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10274 lists the different space sizes.
10277 \begin_layout Standard
10278 \begin_inset Float table
10283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10285 \begin_inset Caption
10287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10290 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10294 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10304 \begin_inset Tabular
10305 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10306 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10531 \begin_inset Index idx
10534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10543 \begin_layout Standard
10544 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10545 in a uniform fashion.
10546 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10547 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10548 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10549 equally between themselves.
10552 \begin_layout Standard
10553 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10556 \begin_layout Quote
10558 This is on the left side
10559 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10562 This is on the right
10565 \begin_layout Quote
10568 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10572 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10578 \begin_layout Quote
10581 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10585 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10589 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10595 \begin_layout Standard
10596 That was an example in the
10602 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10606 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10610 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10613 is one in a standard paragraph.
10614 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10618 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10621 \begin_layout Standard
10622 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10625 \begin_inset space ~
10630 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10633 \begin_layout Standard
10635 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10639 \begin_inset space ~
10645 \begin_layout Standard
10647 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10651 \begin_inset space ~
10657 \begin_layout Standard
10659 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10663 \begin_inset space ~
10669 \begin_layout Standard
10671 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10675 \begin_inset space ~
10681 \begin_layout Standard
10683 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10687 \begin_inset space ~
10693 \begin_layout Standard
10695 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10699 \begin_inset space ~
10705 \begin_layout Standard
10706 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10714 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10718 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10719 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10720 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10724 option in the space dialog.
10732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10736 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10741 \begin_inset Index idx
10744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10753 \begin_layout Standard
10754 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10755 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10758 \begin_layout Standard
10759 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10762 What is correct English?:
10763 \begin_inset Newline newline
10767 \begin_inset Newline newline
10771 \begin_inset space ~
10774 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
10775 \begin_inset Newline newline
10779 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10790 \begin_inset Newline newline
10794 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10805 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10811 \begin_layout Standard
10813 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
10814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10818 \begin_inset space ~
10822 \begin_inset space ~
10826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10830 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
10832 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10833 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10837 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
10839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10843 \begin_inset space ~
10847 \begin_inset space ~
10851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10854 into the phantom inset (note the space after
10855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10863 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
10864 That is why it is named
10865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10873 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
10874 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
10878 \begin_layout Subsection
10880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10882 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
10887 \begin_inset Index idx
10890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10899 \begin_layout Standard
10900 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
10902 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10903 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10905 \begin_inset space ~
10911 There you find the following sizes:
10914 \begin_layout Standard
10927 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
10932 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
10934 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10935 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10937 \begin_inset space ~
10943 \begin_inset Index idx
10946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10947 Document ! Settings
10952 for the paragraph separation.
10953 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
10964 \begin_layout Standard
10970 \begin_inset Index idx
10973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10979 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
10980 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
10985 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
10986 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
10995 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
10999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11004 s are described in section
11005 \begin_inset space ~
11009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11011 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11020 If there are several
11024 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11025 You can therefore use
11029 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11032 \begin_layout Standard
11037 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11038 \begin_inset space ~
11042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11044 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11051 \begin_layout Standard
11052 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11062 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11063 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11075 \begin_layout Subsection
11076 Paragraph Alignment
11077 \begin_inset Index idx
11080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11081 Paragraph ! Alignment
11089 \begin_layout Standard
11090 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11092 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11095 dialog (toolbar button
11098 arg "layout-paragraph"
11102 There are five possibilities:
11105 \begin_layout Itemize
11113 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11119 \begin_layout Itemize
11127 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11133 \begin_layout Itemize
11141 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11147 \begin_layout Itemize
11155 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11161 \begin_layout Itemize
11169 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11175 \begin_layout Standard
11176 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11177 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11178 the left and right margins.
11179 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11182 \begin_layout Standard
11184 This paragraph is right aligned,
11187 \begin_layout Standard
11189 this one is centered,
11192 \begin_layout Standard
11194 this one is left aligned.
11197 \begin_layout Subsection
11199 \begin_inset Index idx
11202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11203 Page breaks ! Forced
11209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11211 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11218 \begin_layout Standard
11219 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11220 can force a page break where you want one.
11221 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11222 Only if you use a lot of
11226 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11229 \begin_layout Standard
11230 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11231 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11235 have to change the page breaking.
11238 \begin_layout Standard
11239 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11241 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11243 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11244 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11246 \begin_inset space ~
11252 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11254 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11255 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11257 \begin_inset space ~
11262 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11264 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11265 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11268 \begin_layout Standard
11269 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11270 at the top of a page.
11271 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11272 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11273 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11274 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11278 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11282 to learn more about
11289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11293 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11298 \begin_inset Index idx
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 Page breaks ! Clear
11310 \begin_layout Standard
11311 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11312 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11313 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11314 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11315 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11318 \begin_layout Standard
11319 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11321 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11322 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11324 \begin_inset space ~
11330 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11332 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11333 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11335 \begin_inset space ~
11339 \begin_inset space ~
11344 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11345 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11348 \begin_layout Subsection
11350 \begin_inset Index idx
11353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11362 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11369 \begin_layout Standard
11370 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11372 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11374 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11375 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11377 \begin_inset space ~
11381 \begin_inset space ~
11389 arg "newline-insert newline"
11393 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11395 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11396 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11398 \begin_inset space ~
11402 \begin_inset space ~
11410 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11413 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11415 This is useful to avoid
11416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11423 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11426 \begin_layout Standard
11427 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11428 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11429 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11430 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11431 \begin_inset space ~
11435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11437 reference "sec:Quote"
11442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11444 reference "sec:Verse"
11449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11451 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11458 \begin_layout Subsection
11460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11462 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11467 \begin_inset Index idx
11470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11479 \begin_layout Standard
11481 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11492 \begin_layout Standard
11496 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11497 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11499 \begin_inset space ~
11504 you can insert horizontal lines.
11505 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11506 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11507 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11512 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11523 \begin_layout Section
11524 Characters and Symbols
11527 \begin_layout Standard
11528 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11529 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11530 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11538 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11542 for information on how this is done.
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11546 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11551 dialog via the menu
11553 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11554 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11560 \begin_layout Standard
11561 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11569 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11570 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11571 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11579 \begin_layout Section
11580 Fonts and Text Styles
11581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11583 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11590 \begin_layout Subsection
11592 \begin_inset Index idx
11595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11604 \begin_layout Standard
11605 There are two types of fonts:
11608 \begin_layout Description
11610 \begin_inset space ~
11614 \begin_inset Index idx
11617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11623 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11628 characters) in the font.
11629 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11630 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11631 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11632 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11633 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11634 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11635 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11636 \begin_inset Newline newline
11639 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11640 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11641 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11642 sizes than at small ones.
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11657 \begin_inset space ~
11665 \begin_layout Description
11667 \begin_inset space ~
11671 \begin_inset Index idx
11674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11680 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11681 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11682 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11683 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11684 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11685 image manipulation program.
11686 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11687 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11691 pixels high up to 34
11692 \begin_inset space ~
11695 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11696 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11697 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11699 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11700 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11701 \begin_inset Newline newline
11704 Bitmap fonts are named
11707 \begin_inset space ~
11712 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11715 \begin_layout Standard
11716 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11717 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11718 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11719 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11720 use scalable fonts.
11723 \begin_layout Standard
11724 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
11727 \begin_layout Standard
11728 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11729 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11730 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11731 font to emphasize text, you use an
11732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11740 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11741 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11745 \begin_layout Subsection
11747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11749 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11756 \begin_layout Standard
11757 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
11758 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11759 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11761 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11762 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
11763 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
11764 to a word processor.
11765 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
11766 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
11767 across different machines.
11768 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
11769 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
11771 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
11773 \begin_inset space ~
11777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11779 reference "sub:Document-Font"
11784 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
11785 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
11789 \begin_layout Standard
11790 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
11791 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
11793 Both engines are supported by LyX.
11794 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
11795 that is installed on your system.
11796 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
11799 \begin_layout Standard
11800 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11808 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
11809 es; so you might have to experiment.
11817 \begin_layout Standard
11818 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11826 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
11827 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
11835 \begin_layout Subsection
11836 Document Font and Font size
11837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11839 name "sub:Document-Font"
11844 \begin_inset Index idx
11847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11854 \begin_inset Index idx
11857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11866 \begin_layout Standard
11867 You can set the document fonts in the
11869 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11873 \begin_inset Index idx
11876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11877 Document ! Settings
11887 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
11888 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
11891 \begin_inset space ~
11900 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
11901 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
11902 with the roman font.
11905 \begin_layout Standard
11912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11921 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
11922 This requires that you use
11928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11967 as the output format, i.
11968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11972 \begin_inset space \space{}
11975 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
11976 \begin_inset space ~
11980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11982 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11987 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
11988 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
11990 \begin_inset space ~
11993 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
11994 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
11995 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
11997 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12000 \begin_layout Standard
12001 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12006 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12011 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12012 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12019 \begin_inset space ~
12025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12038 European Computer Modern
12041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12048 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12051 \begin_layout Standard
12060 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12061 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12066 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12069 \begin_inset space ~
12074 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12080 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12081 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12084 \begin_layout Itemize
12088 \begin_inset space ~
12093 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12106 \begin_inset space ~
12111 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12115 as the default font.
12116 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12117 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12134 One difference is improved kerning.
12142 \begin_layout Itemize
12146 \begin_inset space ~
12150 \begin_inset space ~
12155 fonts in (the rare) case that
12158 \begin_inset space ~
12163 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12178 Virtual means that it
12179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12190 -glyphs from other fonts.
12191 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12213 Loading the LaTeX-package
12218 \begin_inset Index idx
12221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12222 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12227 with the document preamble line
12228 \begin_inset Newline newline
12235 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12236 \begin_inset Newline newline
12241 will fix the guillemet problem.
12246 and that accented characters are not
12250 glyph, but built of
12254 characters, the accent and the letter.
12255 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12261 If you search for example for the French word
12262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12269 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12278 and not for the glyph
12279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12283 \begin_inset space ~
12287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12293 \begin_layout Itemize
12294 If you do not like the look of
12302 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12307 \begin_inset space ~
12313 \begin_inset space ~
12323 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12324 \begin_inset space ~
12327 serif and typewriter fonts,
12331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12332 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12339 \begin_inset space ~
12348 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12353 \begin_inset space \space{}
12361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12365 \begin_inset space \space{}
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12379 \begin_inset space ~
12389 but you can also select your own.
12390 \begin_inset Newline newline
12393 The differences between roman,
12396 \begin_inset space ~
12405 fonts are explained in section
12406 \begin_inset space ~
12410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12412 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12417 \begin_inset Newline newline
12423 \begin_inset space ~
12428 was originally designed for newspapers.
12429 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12430 into the small newspaper columns.
12434 \begin_inset space ~
12439 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12442 \begin_layout Standard
12443 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12456 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12461 depends on the class you are using.
12462 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12465 \begin_layout Standard
12466 Note that the font size is the
12471 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12472 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12473 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12476 \begin_inset space ~
12482 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12489 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12496 \begin_layout Standard
12500 \begin_inset space ~
12505 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12507 \begin_inset space ~
12510 serif or typewriter.
12515 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12525 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12528 \begin_layout Standard
12537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12546 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12552 \begin_inset Index idx
12555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12556 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12562 \begin_inset space ~
12566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12568 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12573 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12574 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12581 \begin_layout Standard
12582 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12584 Use Old Style Figures
12588 Use True Small Caps
12591 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12594 Use Old Style Figures
12596 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12598 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12606 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12610 Use True Small Caps
12612 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12613 of scaled capitals.
12614 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12615 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12618 \begin_layout Standard
12623 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12624 a font to display the script characters.
12628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12629 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12634 \begin_inset Index idx
12637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12638 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12643 So this has no effect for the document language
12657 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12661 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12669 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12673 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12674 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12675 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12677 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12680 dialog, see section
12681 \begin_inset space ~
12685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12687 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12699 \begin_layout Subsection
12700 Using Different Character Styles
12701 \begin_inset Index idx
12704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12711 \begin_inset Index idx
12714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 \begin_layout Standard
12724 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12725 certain paragraph environments.
12726 LyX supports two character styles,
12735 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12739 \begin_layout Standard
12744 style, do one of the following:
12747 \begin_layout Itemize
12748 click on the toolbar button
12757 \begin_layout Itemize
12758 use the key binding
12767 \begin_layout Standard
12768 These commands are all toggles.
12773 style is already active, they deactivate it.
12776 \begin_layout Standard
12777 One typically uses the
12781 style for proper names.
12783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12790 is the original author of LyX.
12791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12797 \begin_layout Standard
12798 A more widely used character style is the
12803 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
12810 \begin_layout Itemize
12811 clicking on the toolbar button
12820 \begin_layout Itemize
12821 using the keybindings
12830 \begin_layout Standard
12835 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
12836 es use a different font.
12839 \begin_layout Standard
12840 We've been using the
12844 style all over the place in this document.
12845 Here's one more example:
12848 \begin_layout Quotation
12851 Do not overuse character styles!
12854 \begin_layout Standard
12855 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
12856 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
12857 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
12858 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
12862 \begin_layout Standard
12863 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
12871 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12873 \begin_inset space ~
12876 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12882 arg "dialog-show character"
12888 \begin_layout Subsection
12889 Fine-Tuning with the
12894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12896 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12901 \begin_inset Index idx
12904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12913 \begin_layout Standard
12914 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
12915 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
12916 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
12917 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
12918 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
12919 from ordinary dialog.
12922 \begin_layout Standard
12923 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
12924 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
12925 \begin_inset Newline newline
12928 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
12929 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
12932 \begin_layout Standard
12933 To use custom character styles, open the
12935 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12937 \begin_inset space ~
12940 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12943 dialog or press the toolbar button
12946 arg "dialog-show character"
12950 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
12951 font property that you can choose.
12952 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
12955 \begin_inset space ~
12960 , which keeps the current state of that property.
12965 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
12966 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
12967 environments all at once.
12970 \begin_layout Standard
12971 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
12974 \begin_inset space ~
12986 \begin_layout Labeling
12987 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
12993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13001 The possible options are:
13005 \begin_layout Labeling
13006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13011 This is the Roman font family.
13012 Normally a serif font.
13013 It's also the default family.
13023 \begin_layout Labeling
13024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13028 \begin_inset space ~
13035 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13047 \begin_layout Labeling
13048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13055 This is the Typewriter font family.
13061 arg "font-typewriter"
13070 \begin_layout Labeling
13071 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13076 This corresponds to the print weight.
13081 \begin_layout Labeling
13082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13087 This is the Medium font series.
13088 It's also the default series.
13091 \begin_layout Labeling
13092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13099 This is the Bold font series.
13112 \begin_layout Labeling
13113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13118 As the name implies.
13123 \begin_layout Labeling
13124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13129 This is the Upright font shape.
13130 It's also the default shape.
13133 \begin_layout Labeling
13134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13148 s the Italic font shape
13154 \begin_layout Labeling
13155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13162 This is the Slanted font shape
13164 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13167 \begin_layout Labeling
13168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13179 This is the Small caps font shape
13186 \begin_layout Labeling
13187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13192 Alters the text color.
13193 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13197 \begin_inset space ~
13202 , which means that the document default color set in
13204 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13205 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13216 is used, you can choose between
13249 \begin_inset Index idx
13252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13261 \begin_layout Labeling
13262 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13267 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13268 the language of the document.
13269 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13271 \begin_inset Newline newline
13274 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13275 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13276 When using the spell checking (see section
13277 \begin_inset space ~
13281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13283 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13287 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13290 \begin_layout Labeling
13291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13296 Alters the size of the font.
13297 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13298 proportional to the document font size.
13299 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13300 what you want to do.
13305 \begin_layout Labeling
13306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13327 arg "font-size tiny"
13333 \begin_layout Labeling
13334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13355 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13361 \begin_layout Labeling
13362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13383 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13389 \begin_layout Labeling
13390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13411 arg "font-size small"
13417 \begin_layout Labeling
13418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13432 It's also the default size.
13436 arg "font-size normal"
13442 \begin_layout Labeling
13443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13464 arg "font-size large"
13470 \begin_layout Labeling
13471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13492 arg "font-size larger"
13498 \begin_layout Labeling
13499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13520 arg "font-size largest"
13526 \begin_layout Labeling
13527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13548 arg "font-size huge"
13554 \begin_layout Labeling
13555 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13576 arg "font-size giant"
13582 \begin_layout Labeling
13583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13588 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13608 arg "font-size increase"
13614 \begin_layout Labeling
13615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13620 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13640 arg "font-size decrease"
13647 \begin_layout Standard
13652 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13653 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13654 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13655 — use those instead.
13656 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13659 \begin_layout Labeling
13660 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13665 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13670 \begin_layout Labeling
13671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13678 This is text with emphasize on
13681 This might seem like the same as
13685 , but it is actually a bit different.
13691 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13693 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13696 \begin_layout Labeling
13697 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13704 This is text with Underbar on.
13710 arg "font-underline"
13716 \begin_inset Newline newline
13721 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13722 when you could not change fonts.
13723 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13724 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13728 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13731 \begin_layout Labeling
13732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13736 \begin_inset space ~
13743 This is text with Double underbar on.
13749 arg "font-underunderline"
13753 \begin_inset Newline newline
13756 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13757 about double underbar.
13760 \begin_layout Labeling
13761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13765 \begin_inset space ~
13772 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13778 arg "font-underwave"
13782 \begin_inset Newline newline
13785 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13786 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13789 \begin_layout Labeling
13790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13797 This is text with Strikeout on.
13803 arg "font-strikeout"
13807 \begin_inset Newline newline
13810 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
13811 changed in the meantime.
13814 \begin_layout Labeling
13815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13822 This is text with Noun on.
13829 , this is a logical attribute.
13830 Normally it's equivalent to
13833 \begin_inset space ~
13842 \begin_layout Standard
13843 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
13844 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
13846 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13848 \begin_inset space ~
13851 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13857 arg "dialog-show character"
13860 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
13861 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
13864 arg "textstyle-apply"
13868 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
13872 \begin_layout Standard
13873 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
13880 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
13881 (suppose you just set the shape to
13882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13900 \begin_inset space ~
13912 \begin_layout Standard
13913 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
13921 \begin_inset space ~
13933 \begin_layout Itemize
13939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13946 font, which means every character has the same width; the
13947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13964 \begin_inset Newline newline
13968 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13982 \begin_inset Note Note
13985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13986 For more on phantoms see section
13987 \begin_inset space ~
13991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13993 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14003 \begin_inset Newline newline
14009 \begin_layout Itemize
14014 fonts use characters with serifs.
14015 These are the small
14016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14023 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14024 The following example shows the difference:
14025 \begin_inset Newline newline
14029 \begin_inset Newline newline
14034 text without serifs
14037 \begin_inset Newline newline
14040 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14041 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14048 \begin_layout Itemize
14053 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14054 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14055 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14058 \begin_layout Standard
14059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14066 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14067 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14070 \begin_inset space ~
14075 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14076 the property to be removed.
14077 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14078 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14079 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14097 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14098 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14106 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14110 \begin_inset space ~
14115 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14126 If you, for example, set
14127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14145 \begin_inset space ~
14150 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14159 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14162 \begin_layout Standard
14163 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14164 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14167 \begin_layout Section
14168 Printing and Previewing
14171 \begin_layout Subsection
14175 \begin_layout Standard
14176 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14177 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14178 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14179 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14180 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14182 Additional Features
14187 \begin_layout Standard
14188 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14189 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14190 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14191 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14192 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14193 This happens in two stages:
14196 \begin_layout Enumerate
14197 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14198 generating a file with the extension,
14199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14213 \begin_layout Enumerate
14214 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14218 file to produce printable output.
14221 \begin_layout Subsection
14222 Output file formats
14223 \begin_inset Index idx
14226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14235 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14243 Simple text (ASCII)
14244 \begin_inset Index idx
14247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14248 File formats ! ASCII
14256 \begin_layout Standard
14257 This file type has the extension
14258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14270 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14274 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14281 \begin_layout Standard
14282 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14284 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14285 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14287 \begin_inset space ~
14293 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14294 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14295 \begin_inset space ~
14299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14301 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14306 If your document includes such material, use
14308 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14309 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14311 \begin_inset space ~
14315 \begin_inset space ~
14319 \begin_inset space ~
14327 \begin_inset space ~
14331 \begin_inset space ~
14337 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14338 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14343 \begin_inset Index idx
14346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14347 File formats ! LaTeX
14355 \begin_layout Standard
14356 This file type has the extension
14357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14368 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14370 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14371 it manually with console commands.
14372 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14373 you view or export your document.
14376 \begin_layout Standard
14377 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14379 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14380 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14395 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14396 \begin_inset space ~
14400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14402 reference "sub:Export"
14409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14411 \begin_inset Index idx
14414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14423 \begin_layout Standard
14424 This file type has the extension
14425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14445 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14446 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14447 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14451 \begin_layout Standard
14452 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14453 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14454 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14455 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14456 when you view the DVI.
14457 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14460 \begin_layout Standard
14461 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14463 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14464 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14469 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14470 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14472 \begin_inset space ~
14479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14489 The latter option uses the program
14498 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14499 font access (see section
14500 \begin_inset space ~
14504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14506 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14511 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14512 standard TeX processor.
14515 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14517 \begin_inset Index idx
14520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14521 File formats ! PostScript
14529 \begin_layout Standard
14530 This file type has the extension
14531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14543 PostScript was developed by the company
14547 as a printer language.
14548 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14550 PostScript can be seen as a
14551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14554 programming language
14555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14558 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14563 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14569 \begin_inset Index idx
14572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14573 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14583 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14586 \begin_layout Standard
14587 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14591 Encapsulated PostScript
14592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14595 (EPS, file extension
14596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14608 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14609 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14610 If, for example, you have 50
14611 \begin_inset space ~
14614 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14615 \begin_inset space ~
14618 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14619 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14620 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14621 EPS to avoid this problem.
14624 \begin_layout Standard
14625 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14627 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14628 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14636 \begin_inset Index idx
14639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14646 \begin_inset Index idx
14649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14658 \begin_layout Standard
14659 This file type has the extension
14660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14676 Portable Document Format
14677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14684 was derived from PostScript.
14685 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14694 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
14695 looks exactly the same.
14698 \begin_layout Standard
14699 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14703 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14707 (JPG, file extension
14708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14735 Portable Network Graphics
14736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14739 (PNG, file extension
14740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14752 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14753 background to one of these formats.
14754 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14755 will slow down your workflow.
14756 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
14759 \begin_layout Standard
14760 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14762 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14768 \begin_layout Description
14770 \begin_inset space ~
14773 (pdflatex) This uses the program
14777 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14780 \begin_layout Description
14782 \begin_inset space ~
14789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14796 X) This uses the program
14800 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14805 is a new engine, derived from
14809 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
14810 access (see section
14811 \begin_inset space ~
14815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14817 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14822 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14823 standard TeX processor.
14826 \begin_layout Description
14828 \begin_inset space ~
14835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14842 X) This uses the program
14846 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14851 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14852 font access (see section
14853 \begin_inset space ~
14857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14859 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14864 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
14865 vertically written Japanese.
14868 \begin_layout Description
14870 \begin_inset space ~
14873 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14877 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14881 \begin_layout Description
14883 \begin_inset space ~
14886 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
14890 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14891 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14895 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14896 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
14899 \begin_layout Standard
14903 \begin_inset space ~
14912 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
14913 works without problems.
14914 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
14915 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
14919 \begin_inset space ~
14926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14938 \begin_inset space ~
14945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14954 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
14962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14964 \begin_inset Index idx
14967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14968 FileFormats ! XHTML
14974 \begin_inset Index idx
14977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14986 \begin_layout Standard
14987 This file type has the extension
14988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15000 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15001 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15002 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15003 suitable for the purpose.
15004 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15006 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15007 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15010 between different formats, which are described in section
15012 Math Output in XHTML
15017 \begin_inset space ~
15025 \begin_layout Standard
15026 XHTML output remains
15027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15034 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15037 LyX and the World Wide Web
15041 Additional Features
15043 manual, for more information.
15046 \begin_layout Standard
15047 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15049 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15050 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15056 \begin_layout Subsection
15058 \begin_inset Index idx
15061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15070 \begin_layout Standard
15071 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15072 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15081 or use the toolbar button
15088 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15089 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15096 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15100 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15108 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15113 Further output formats can be selected via
15115 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15116 View (Other Formats)
15118 or the toolbar button
15119 \begin_inset Graphics
15120 filename ../images/view-others.png
15122 groupId toolbarbuttons
15129 \begin_layout Standard
15130 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15131 viewer window using the menu
15133 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15138 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15139 Update (Other Formats)
15144 \begin_layout Standard
15145 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15147 To have a real output, export your document.
15150 \begin_layout Subsection
15151 Printing the File from within LyX
15152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15154 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15161 \begin_layout Standard
15162 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15163 it directly from within LyX.
15164 To print a file, select the menu
15166 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15172 arg "dialog-show print"
15175 ) or click on the toolbar button
15178 arg "dialog-show print"
15182 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15183 This file is then processed by the program
15187 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15192 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15196 You can set the following print parameters in the
15199 \begin_inset space ~
15207 \begin_layout Labeling
15208 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15213 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15218 Note that this printer name is for the program
15227 has to be configured for this printer name.
15228 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15229 \begin_inset space ~
15233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15235 reference "sub:Printer"
15244 The printer should understand PostScript.
15247 \begin_layout Labeling
15248 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15253 The name of a file to print to.
15254 The output will be a PostScript file.
15255 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15259 \begin_layout Standard
15260 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15261 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15262 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15263 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15264 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15265 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15266 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15269 \begin_layout Section
15270 A few Words about Typography
15271 \begin_inset Index idx
15274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15283 \begin_layout Subsection
15284 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15285 \begin_inset Index idx
15288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15295 \begin_inset Index idx
15298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15307 \begin_layout Standard
15309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15320 character comes in four lengths: the
15332 , and the minus sign:
15333 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15339 \begin_layout Standard
15340 \begin_inset Tabular
15341 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15342 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15343 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15344 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15345 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15346 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15375 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15415 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15440 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15442 \begin_inset space ~
15445 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15452 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15477 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15479 \begin_inset space ~
15482 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15503 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15537 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15543 \begin_layout Standard
15544 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15556 character multiple times in a row.
15557 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15558 the final output, but not in LyX.
15560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15590 \begin_layout Standard
15591 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15592 math mode and has a length of its own.
15593 Here are some examples:
15596 \begin_layout Enumerate
15597 line- and page-breaks
15598 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15608 \begin_layout Enumerate
15610 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15620 \begin_layout Enumerate
15621 Oh — there's a dash.
15622 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15632 \begin_layout Enumerate
15633 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15637 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15647 \begin_layout Subsection
15649 \begin_inset Index idx
15652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15661 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15668 \begin_layout Standard
15669 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15670 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15675 \begin_inset Index idx
15678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15679 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15684 following the rules of the document language.
15687 \begin_layout Standard
15688 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
15693 font and with unusual constructs, like
15694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15702 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15704 This is done with the menu
15706 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15707 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15709 \begin_inset space ~
15715 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15716 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15719 \begin_layout Standard
15720 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15721 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15731 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15739 as a hyphenation possibility.
15740 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15741 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15742 as described in section
15743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 Prevent Hyphenation
15747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15753 \begin_inset space ~
15761 \begin_layout Subsection
15763 \begin_inset Index idx
15766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15775 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15776 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15779 name "sub:Abbreviations"
15786 \begin_layout Standard
15787 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
15788 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15789 LaTeX then adds the
15790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15793 appropriate amount of space.
15794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15797 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15799 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
15800 gets after another word.
15803 \begin_layout Standard
15804 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15805 not work in all cases.
15807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15818 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15819 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15822 \begin_layout Standard
15823 Here are some examples of
15827 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
15830 \begin_layout Itemize
15835 \begin_layout Itemize
15840 \begin_layout Standard
15841 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15844 \begin_layout Itemize
15846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15850 this is too much space!
15853 \begin_layout Itemize
15858 \begin_layout Standard
15859 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15862 \begin_layout Standard
15863 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15866 \begin_layout Enumerate
15870 \begin_inset space ~
15875 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15882 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
15887 \begin_inset Index idx
15890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15891 Spaces ! inter-word
15899 \begin_layout Enumerate
15903 \begin_inset space ~
15908 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15909 \begin_inset space ~
15913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15915 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
15920 \begin_inset Index idx
15923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15932 \begin_layout Enumerate
15936 \begin_inset space ~
15940 \begin_inset space ~
15944 \begin_inset space ~
15951 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15953 \begin_inset space ~
15958 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15959 This function is also bound to
15962 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15968 \begin_layout Standard
15969 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15972 \begin_layout Itemize
15974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15978 \begin_inset space \space{}
15981 this is too much space!
15984 \begin_layout Itemize
15985 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
15989 \begin_layout Standard
15990 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15991 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
15992 will take care of this.
15995 \begin_layout Standard
15996 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16000 \begin_inset space ~
16005 feature described in the section
16011 Additional Features
16016 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16018 \begin_inset Index idx
16021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16022 Typography ! Quotes
16028 \begin_inset Index idx
16031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16062 \begin_layout Standard
16063 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16064 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16065 and use a closing quote at the end.
16067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16075 The keyboard character,
16079 , generates this automatically.
16082 \begin_layout Standard
16083 You can specify what character the
16087 key produces using the submenu
16093 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16097 \begin_inset Index idx
16100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16101 Document ! Settings
16111 There are six choices:
16114 \begin_layout Labeling
16115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16138 \begin_layout Labeling
16139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16142 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16146 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16152 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16156 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16162 \begin_layout Labeling
16163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16166 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16170 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16176 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16180 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16186 \begin_layout Labeling
16187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16190 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16194 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16200 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16204 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16210 \begin_layout Labeling
16211 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16214 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16218 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16224 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16228 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16234 \begin_layout Labeling
16235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16238 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16242 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16248 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16252 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16258 \begin_layout Standard
16259 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16262 arg "quote-insert single"
16268 \begin_layout Subsection
16270 \begin_inset Index idx
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16274 Typography ! Ligatures
16280 \begin_inset Index idx
16283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16314 name "sub:Ligatures"
16321 \begin_layout Standard
16322 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16323 print them as single characters.
16324 These groups are known as
16329 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16331 Here are the standard ligatures:
16334 \begin_layout Itemize
16338 \begin_layout Itemize
16342 \begin_layout Itemize
16346 \begin_layout Itemize
16350 \begin_layout Itemize
16354 \begin_layout Standard
16355 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16358 \begin_layout Standard
16359 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16360 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16368 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16384 To break a ligature, use
16386 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16387 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16389 \begin_inset space ~
16396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16407 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16424 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16432 \begin_layout Subsection
16434 \begin_inset Index idx
16437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16446 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16453 \begin_layout Standard
16454 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16455 characters in different sizes and heights.
16456 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16457 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 \begin_inset Note Note
16480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16481 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16489 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16490 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16495 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16496 following proper names:
16499 \begin_layout Description
16500 LyX The name of the game, write
16501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16522 \begin_layout Description
16523 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16545 \begin_layout Description
16546 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16568 \begin_layout Description
16569 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16591 \begin_layout Standard
16592 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16597 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16605 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16606 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16607 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16610 : The actual version is
16611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16618 , the previous one was
16619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16629 \begin_layout Standard
16630 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16631 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16632 In LyX this will look like
16633 \begin_inset Graphics
16634 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16640 \begin_inset Newline newline
16643 For more about TeX Code, see section
16644 \begin_inset space ~
16648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16650 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16657 \begin_layout Subsection
16659 \begin_inset Index idx
16662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16671 \begin_layout Standard
16672 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16673 space between two words.
16674 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16684 for units use the menu
16686 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16687 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16689 \begin_inset space ~
16697 arg "space-insert thin"
16703 \begin_layout Standard
16704 Here is an example to show the differences:
16707 \begin_layout Standard
16708 \begin_inset Tabular
16709 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16710 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16711 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16712 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16719 \begin_inset space ~
16723 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16735 space between number and unit
16742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16751 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16763 half space between number and unit
16776 \begin_layout Subsection
16778 \begin_inset Index idx
16781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16782 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16790 \begin_layout Standard
16791 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16793 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16794 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16795 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16796 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16797 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16798 These bits of text became known as
16809 \begin_layout Standard
16810 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16811 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16812 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16813 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16814 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
16815 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
16816 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
16819 \begin_layout Standard
16820 We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can
16821 tweak that behavior.
16822 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
16823 \begin_inset space ~
16827 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16829 key "latexcompanion"
16834 \begin_inset space ~
16838 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16844 ) may have more information.
16845 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16848 \begin_layout Chapter
16849 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
16850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16852 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16859 \begin_layout Standard
16860 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16863 \begin_inset space ~
16869 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16872 \begin_layout Section
16874 \begin_inset Index idx
16877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16893 \begin_layout Standard
16894 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16897 \begin_layout Description
16899 \begin_inset space ~
16902 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16903 \begin_inset Newline newline
16907 \begin_inset Note Note
16910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16911 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16919 \begin_layout Description
16920 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
16921 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
16923 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16924 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16937 \begin_inset space ~
16943 \begin_inset Newline newline
16947 \begin_inset Note Comment
16950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16951 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
16959 \begin_layout Description
16961 \begin_inset space ~
16964 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16965 set in the document settings under
16967 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16969 \begin_inset space ~
16975 \begin_inset Newline newline
16979 \begin_inset Newline newline
16983 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16992 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
16993 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
16998 of a comment that appears in the output.
17004 \begin_inset Newline newline
17008 \begin_inset Newline newline
17011 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17014 \begin_layout Standard
17015 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17023 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17027 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17030 \begin_layout Section
17032 \begin_inset Index idx
17035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17044 name "sec:Footnotes"
17051 \begin_layout Standard
17052 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17055 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17058 or the toolbar button
17061 arg "footnote-insert"
17073 \begin_inset Graphics
17074 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17083 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17112 label, the box will
17116 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17117 Clicking on the box label again will close
17130 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17131 and click on the footnote
17146 \begin_layout Standard
17147 Here is an example footnote:
17155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17156 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17164 \begin_layout Standard
17165 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17166 position where the footnote box is placed.
17167 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17168 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17169 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17170 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17175 ey are described in the
17178 \begin_inset space ~
17186 \begin_layout Section
17188 \begin_inset Index idx
17191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17200 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17207 \begin_layout Standard
17208 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17209 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17211 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17213 \begin_inset space ~
17218 or the toolbar button
17221 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17247 appearing within your text.
17248 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17257 \begin_layout Standard
17258 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17262 \begin_inset Marginal
17265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17267 This is a marginal note.
17275 \begin_layout Standard
17276 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17277 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17278 pages, right on odd pages.
17281 \begin_layout Standard
17282 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17285 \begin_inset space ~
17293 \begin_inset space ~
17301 \begin_layout Section
17302 Graphics and Images
17303 \begin_inset Index idx
17306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17313 \begin_inset Index idx
17316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17325 name "sec:Graphics"
17332 \begin_layout Standard
17333 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17334 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17337 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17342 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17346 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17349 \begin_layout Standard
17350 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17355 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17356 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17358 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17359 \begin_inset space ~
17363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17365 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17372 \begin_layout Standard
17377 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17378 of the image in the output.
17379 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17383 \begin_inset space ~
17387 \begin_inset space ~
17396 \begin_inset space ~
17400 \begin_inset space ~
17404 \begin_inset space ~
17409 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17410 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17418 \begin_layout Standard
17425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17433 \begin_inset space ~
17437 \begin_inset space ~
17444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17453 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17454 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17458 \begin_inset space ~
17463 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17464 with the image size is printed.
17468 \begin_inset space ~
17472 \begin_inset space ~
17476 \begin_inset space ~
17481 is explained in the
17484 \begin_inset space ~
17496 \begin_layout Standard
17497 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17498 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17500 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17503 \begin_layout Standard
17505 \begin_inset Graphics
17506 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17514 \begin_layout Standard
17515 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17516 the image into a float, see section
17517 \begin_inset space ~
17521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17523 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17530 \begin_layout Subsection
17532 \begin_inset Index idx
17535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17544 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17551 \begin_layout Standard
17552 You can insert images in any known file format.
17553 But as we explained in section
17554 \begin_inset space ~
17558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17560 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17564 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17565 LyX therefore uses the program
17569 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17570 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17571 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17572 \begin_inset space ~
17576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17578 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17585 \begin_layout Standard
17586 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17589 \begin_layout Description
17591 \begin_inset space ~
17594 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17595 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17596 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17600 Graphics Interchange Format
17601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17604 (GIF, file extension
17605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17617 \begin_inset Index idx
17620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17652 Portable Network Graphics
17653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17656 (PNG, file extension
17657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17669 \begin_inset Index idx
17672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17704 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17708 (JPG, file extension
17709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17733 \begin_inset Index idx
17736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17767 \begin_layout Description
17769 \begin_inset space ~
17772 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17774 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
17775 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17776 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17777 \begin_inset Newline newline
17780 Scalable image formats can be
17781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17784 Scalable Vector Graphics
17785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17788 (SVG, file extension
17789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17801 \begin_inset Index idx
17804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17836 Encapsulated PostScript
17837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17840 (EPS, file extension
17841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17853 \begin_inset Index idx
17856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17888 Portable Document Format
17889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17892 (PDF, file extension
17893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17905 \begin_inset Index idx
17908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17923 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
17924 result will not be scalable.
17925 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17931 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17939 \begin_layout Standard
17940 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
17947 \begin_layout Subsection
17948 Grouping of Image Settings
17949 \begin_inset Index idx
17952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17953 Images ! Settings grouping
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17962 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17964 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17965 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17967 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17968 need to manually change each of them.
17972 \begin_layout Standard
17973 A new group can be set by pressing the button
17976 \begin_inset space ~
17980 \begin_inset space ~
17995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18003 \begin_inset space ~
18007 \begin_inset space ~
18014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18024 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18025 and checking the name of the desired group.
18028 \begin_layout Section
18030 \begin_inset Index idx
18033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18049 \begin_layout Standard
18050 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18053 arg "tabular-insert"
18058 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18062 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18063 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18064 from the rest of the table.
18065 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18066 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18068 Here is an example table:
18071 \begin_layout Standard
18073 \begin_inset Tabular
18074 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18075 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18077 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18078 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18079 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18279 \begin_layout Subsection
18283 \begin_layout Standard
18284 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18287 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18291 This brings up the table dialog.
18292 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18293 cursor is placed currently.
18294 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18295 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18296 done on all of your selection.
18299 \begin_layout Standard
18300 In addition to the table dialog, the
18303 \begin_inset space ~
18308 helps you in setting table properties.
18309 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18312 \begin_layout Standard
18316 \begin_inset space ~
18321 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18322 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18323 current cell respectively.
18324 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18326 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18327 of text, see section
18328 \begin_inset space ~
18332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18334 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18341 \begin_layout Standard
18342 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18343 using the check box
18352 This will merge the cells to
18356 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18357 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18358 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18359 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18360 in the last row without the upper border:
18363 \begin_layout Standard
18365 \begin_inset Tabular
18366 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18367 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18369 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18370 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18371 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18382 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18391 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18467 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18502 \begin_layout Standard
18503 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18504 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18505 explained in the chapter
18512 \begin_inset space ~
18518 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18522 degrees counterclockwise.
18523 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18526 \begin_layout Standard
18527 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18535 Most DVI-viewers are
18539 able to display rotations.
18547 \begin_layout Standard
18552 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18557 adds lines for all cell borders.
18560 \begin_layout Subsection
18562 \begin_inset Index idx
18565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18566 Tables ! Longtables
18572 \begin_inset Index idx
18575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18584 \begin_layout Standard
18585 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18588 \begin_inset space ~
18592 \begin_inset space ~
18601 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18602 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18605 \begin_layout Description
18610 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18611 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18612 except for the first page, if
18615 \begin_inset space ~
18623 \begin_layout Description
18627 \begin_inset space ~
18632 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18633 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18636 \begin_layout Description
18641 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18642 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18643 except for the last page, if
18646 \begin_inset space ~
18654 \begin_layout Description
18658 \begin_inset space ~
18663 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18664 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18667 \begin_layout Description
18668 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18669 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18671 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18675 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18678 \begin_inset space ~
18686 \begin_layout Standard
18687 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18688 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18689 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18695 In this context, first means first in this order:
18698 \begin_inset space ~
18710 \begin_inset space ~
18715 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18718 \begin_layout Standard
18720 \begin_inset Tabular
18721 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18722 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18723 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18724 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18725 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18726 <row endfirsthead="true">
18727 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18733 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18738 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18747 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18757 <row endfirsthead="true">
18758 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18769 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18778 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18790 <row endhead="true">
18791 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18802 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18811 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 <row endhead="true">
18822 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18842 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18854 <row endfoot="true">
18855 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18875 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18906 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19847 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19856 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19865 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19876 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19907 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19938 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19969 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20000 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20031 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20062 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20093 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20124 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20155 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20217 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20279 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20310 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20341 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20372 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20403 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20434 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20465 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20496 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20527 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20558 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20589 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20620 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20651 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20713 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20744 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20806 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <row endlastfoot="true">
20837 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20857 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 \begin_layout Subsection
20876 \begin_inset Index idx
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20888 name "sub:Table-Cells"
20895 \begin_layout Standard
20896 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20897 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20898 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20899 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20903 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
20906 \begin_layout Standard
20907 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20908 for the column in the table dialog.
20909 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20910 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20914 \begin_layout Standard
20916 \begin_inset Tabular
20917 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20918 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
20919 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20920 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21010 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 This is longer now.
21071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21123 This is longer now.
21128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21154 \begin_layout Standard
21155 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21156 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21162 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21168 Selection with the mouse or with
21172 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21173 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21174 the selection from outside the table.
21177 \begin_layout Section
21179 \begin_inset Index idx
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21198 \begin_layout Subsection
21202 \begin_layout Standard
21203 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21204 have a fixed location.
21206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21213 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21221 \begin_inset space ~
21226 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21227 too many notes on the current page.
21230 \begin_layout Standard
21231 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21232 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21233 and pages without text.
21234 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21235 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21236 Floats are therefore numbered.
21237 Referencing is described in section
21238 \begin_inset space ~
21242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21244 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21251 \begin_layout Standard
21252 To insert a float, use the menu
21254 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21258 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21259 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21261 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21262 \begin_inset Index idx
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21271 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21272 paragraph within the float.
21273 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21274 by left-clicking on the box label.
21275 A closed float box looks like this:
21276 \begin_inset Graphics
21277 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21282 – a gray button with a red label.
21285 \begin_layout Standard
21286 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21287 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21290 \begin_layout Subsection
21294 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21298 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21303 \begin_inset Index idx
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 Floats ! Figure floats
21315 \begin_layout Standard
21317 \begin_inset space ~
21321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21323 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21327 was created using the menu
21329 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21330 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21336 arg "float-insert figure"
21340 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21343 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21349 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21353 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21354 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21356 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21358 \begin_inset space ~
21366 arg "layout-paragraph"
21372 \begin_layout Standard
21373 \begin_inset Float figure
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 \begin_inset Graphics
21381 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21396 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21400 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21413 \begin_layout Standard
21414 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21415 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21417 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21426 ) and refer to it using the menu
21428 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21434 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21438 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21439 vague references like
21440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21447 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21457 For more about cross-references, see section
21458 \begin_inset space ~
21462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21464 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21471 \begin_layout Standard
21472 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21473 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21474 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21475 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21476 as described in section
21477 \begin_inset space ~
21481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21483 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21489 \begin_inset space ~
21493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21495 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21499 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21500 You can also set the images one below the other.
21502 \begin_inset space ~
21506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21508 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21515 reference "fig:Platypus"
21519 are the subfigures.
21522 \begin_layout Standard
21523 \begin_inset Float figure
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21533 \begin_inset Float figure
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21544 name "fig:Undefinable"
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 \begin_inset Graphics
21558 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21569 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21573 \begin_inset Float figure
21578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21579 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21584 name "fig:Platypus"
21596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 \begin_inset Graphics
21598 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21610 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21622 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21626 Two distorted images.
21639 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21641 \begin_inset Index idx
21644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21645 Floats ! Table floats
21653 \begin_layout Standard
21654 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21656 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21657 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21660 or the toolbar button
21663 arg "float-insert table"
21667 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21668 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21669 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
21671 \begin_inset space ~
21675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21677 reference "tab:Table-float"
21684 \begin_layout Standard
21685 \begin_inset Float table
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21696 name "tab:Table-float"
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21710 \begin_inset Tabular
21711 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21712 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21713 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21714 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21715 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21863 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21866 \end{array}\right]$
21874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21887 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21908 \begin_layout Subsection
21910 \begin_inset Index idx
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 \begin_layout Standard
21923 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21924 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21925 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21927 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
21935 \begin_inset space ~
21943 \begin_layout Section
21945 \begin_inset Index idx
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21957 \begin_layout Standard
21958 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
21960 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21961 \begin_inset space \space{}
21968 \begin_layout Standard
21969 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21971 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21975 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21976 and its alignment within the page.
21979 \begin_layout Standard
21981 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21991 height_special "totalheight"
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 This is a minipage.
21998 The text is set in an italic style.
22001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22005 another formatting.
22013 \begin_layout Standard
22014 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22017 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22021 as described in section
22022 \begin_inset space ~
22026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22028 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22033 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22039 \begin_layout Standard
22040 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22050 height_special "totalheight"
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22055 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22061 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22065 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22075 height_special "totalheight"
22078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22079 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22080 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22088 \begin_layout Standard
22089 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22095 \begin_layout Standard
22096 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22098 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22105 \begin_inset space ~
22113 \begin_layout Chapter
22114 Mathematical Formulas
22115 \begin_inset Index idx
22118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 \begin_inset Index idx
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22159 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22166 \begin_layout Standard
22167 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22172 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22175 \begin_layout Section
22177 \begin_inset Index idx
22180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 \begin_layout Standard
22190 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22203 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22205 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22206 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22207 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22209 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22215 \begin_layout Standard
22216 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22220 \begin_inset space ~
22225 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22228 \begin_layout Standard
22229 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22230 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22233 \begin_layout Standard
22234 This is a line with an inline formula
22235 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22241 \begin_layout Standard
22242 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22243 paragraph, like this one:
22244 \begin_inset Formula
22251 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22254 \begin_layout Standard
22255 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22256 For example, typing
22257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22270 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22271 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22275 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22278 \begin_inset space ~
22286 \begin_layout Subsection
22287 Navigating in Formulas
22288 \begin_inset Index idx
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22300 \begin_layout Standard
22301 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22302 achieved with the arrow keys.
22303 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22304 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22309 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22310 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22314 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22318 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22321 \end{array}\right]$
22329 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22334 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22335 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22338 \begin_layout Standard
22343 , printed in this document as
22344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22365 \begin_inset Note Note
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting
22370 the space character (visible space).
22375 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22376 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22377 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22382 For example, if you want
22383 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 , since in the latter case only the
22440 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22445 will be under the square root sign:
22446 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22452 \begin_layout Standard
22453 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22455 \begin_inset Formula
22457 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22466 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22467 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22470 \begin_layout Subsection
22474 \begin_layout Standard
22475 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22476 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22480 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22481 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22482 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22483 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22484 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22487 \begin_layout Subsection
22488 Exponents and Subscripts
22489 \begin_inset Index idx
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 \begin_inset Index idx
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22511 \begin_layout Standard
22512 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22515 arg "math-superscript"
22521 arg "math-subscript"
22524 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22526 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22529 , type in a formula
22535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22551 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22557 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22561 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22591 , you have to use an extra
22595 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22596 For example, if you want
22597 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 Subscripts are similar: To get
22619 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22642 \begin_layout Subsection
22644 \begin_inset Index idx
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 \begin_layout Standard
22657 Create a fraction either with the command
22663 or by using the icon
22666 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22672 \begin_inset space ~
22678 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22679 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22680 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22685 To move back up, press
22690 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22691 \begin_inset Formula
22693 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22696 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22704 \begin_layout Subsection
22706 \begin_inset Index idx
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22718 \begin_layout Standard
22719 Roots can be created using the
22722 \begin_inset space ~
22730 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22736 arg "math-insert \\root"
22758 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22764 always produces a square root.
22767 \begin_layout Subsection
22768 Operators with Limits
22769 \begin_inset Index idx
22772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22779 \begin_inset Index idx
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22791 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22798 \begin_layout Standard
22800 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22804 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22807 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22808 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22809 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22810 The sum operator will automatically place its
22811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22818 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22820 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22824 \begin_inset Formula
22826 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22831 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22835 \begin_layout Standard
22836 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22838 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22839 behind the operator and using the menu
22841 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22842 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22844 \begin_inset space ~
22848 \begin_inset space ~
22862 \begin_layout Standard
22863 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
22864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22872 \begin_inset Index idx
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 \begin_inset Formula
22884 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22889 which will place the
22890 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22902 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22903 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22909 \begin_layout Standard
22910 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22917 Have a look at section
22918 \begin_inset space ~
22922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22924 reference "sub:Functions"
22928 for an explanation of function macros.
22931 \begin_layout Subsection
22933 \begin_inset Index idx
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22945 \begin_layout Standard
22946 Most math symbols can be found in the
22949 \begin_inset space ~
22954 under one of several categories; including
22971 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22975 \begin_layout Standard
22976 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
22977 you don't have to use the
22980 \begin_inset space ~
22985 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
22986 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22989 \begin_layout Subsection
22991 \begin_inset Index idx
22994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23003 \begin_layout Standard
23004 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23009 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
23015 \begin_inset space ~
23025 arg "math-insert \\space"
23031 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23032 For example, the sequence
23037 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23041 \begin_inset Graphics
23042 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23047 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23048 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23049 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23050 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23052 Here are two examples:
23055 \begin_layout Standard
23065 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23071 \begin_layout Standard
23081 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23087 \begin_layout Subsection
23089 \begin_inset Index idx
23092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23101 name "sub:Functions"
23108 \begin_layout Standard
23112 \begin_inset space ~
23117 contains under the button
23122 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23127 a number of function macros, such as
23128 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23132 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23140 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23147 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23148 avoid confusions, because
23149 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23153 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23159 \begin_layout Standard
23160 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23162 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23166 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23172 \begin_layout Standard
23173 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23174 are placed, as described in section
23175 \begin_inset space ~
23179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23181 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23188 \begin_layout Subsection
23190 \begin_inset Index idx
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23202 \begin_layout Standard
23203 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23205 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23206 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23207 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23210 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23211 Our example is entered by typing
23219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23232 \begin_inset space ~
23236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23238 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23242 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23245 \begin_layout Standard
23246 \begin_inset Float table
23251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23257 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23261 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23271 \begin_inset Tabular
23272 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23273 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23274 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23275 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23276 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23414 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23468 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23837 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23858 \begin_layout Standard
23859 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23862 \begin_inset space ~
23870 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23873 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23877 \begin_layout Section
23878 Brackets and Delimiters
23879 \begin_inset Index idx
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 \begin_inset Index idx
23892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23901 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23908 \begin_layout Standard
23909 There are several brackets available through LyX.
23910 For some purposes, using just the keys
23915 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23916 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23917 toolbar delimiter icon
23920 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23924 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
23925 \begin_inset Formula
23927 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23935 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23936 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23940 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23943 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23949 \begin_inset Formula
23951 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23959 \begin_layout Standard
23960 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23961 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23965 \begin_layout Standard
23966 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23967 left side and right side.
23968 If you use the option
23971 \begin_inset space ~
23976 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23977 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
23978 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
23983 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23986 \begin_layout Standard
23987 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
23988 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
23989 is to go inside the brackets.
23990 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23995 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
23996 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
23997 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24001 arg "math-delim ( )"
24007 \begin_layout Section
24008 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24009 \begin_inset Index idx
24012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 \begin_inset Index idx
24022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24029 \begin_inset Index idx
24032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24033 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24041 \begin_layout Standard
24042 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24045 \begin_inset space ~
24055 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24061 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24062 Here is an example:
24063 \begin_inset Formula
24065 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24074 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24075 \begin_inset space ~
24079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24081 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24086 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24087 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24088 This alignment is set in the box
24093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24141 for every column as default.
24142 For example, the sequence
24143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24154 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24155 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24156 corresponds to the relevant column.
24157 The result will look like this:
24158 \begin_inset Formula
24161 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24162 column & has & has\, right\\
24163 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24172 \begin_layout Standard
24173 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24176 arg "newline-insert newline"
24179 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24180 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24182 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24185 or the math toolbar.
24188 \begin_layout Standard
24189 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24190 It can be created with the menu
24192 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24193 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24195 \begin_inset space ~
24207 Here is an example:
24208 \begin_inset Formula
24222 \begin_layout Standard
24223 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24226 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24229 arg "newline-insert newline"
24233 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24238 arg "newline-insert newline"
24241 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24249 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24250 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24251 A new row is created by every further entry of
24254 arg "newline-insert newline"
24258 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24259 Here is an example:
24260 \begin_inset Formula
24262 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24263 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24268 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24269 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24270 \begin_inset Formula
24272 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24280 \begin_layout Standard
24281 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24288 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24289 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24292 reference "eq:asquared"
24297 The other types are described in section
24298 \begin_inset space ~
24302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24304 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24311 \begin_layout Section
24312 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24313 \begin_inset Index idx
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24317 Math ! Formula numbering
24323 \begin_inset Index idx
24326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 Math ! Referencing formulas
24333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24335 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24342 \begin_layout Standard
24343 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24345 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24346 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24348 \begin_inset space ~
24352 \begin_inset space ~
24360 arg "math-number-toggle"
24364 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24365 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24366 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24367 the document class.
24368 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24369 separated by a dot:
24370 \begin_inset Formula
24380 arg "math-number-toggle"
24383 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24384 You can only number displayed formulas.
24387 \begin_layout Standard
24388 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24390 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24391 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24393 \begin_inset space ~
24397 \begin_inset space ~
24405 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24408 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24409 \begin_inset Formula
24412 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24418 To number all lines use the shortcut
24421 arg "math-number-toggle"
24427 \begin_layout Standard
24428 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24431 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24432 A label is inserted with the menu
24434 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24443 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24444 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24445 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24457 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24458 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24459 We inserted in the following example the label
24460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24467 in the second line:
24468 \begin_inset Formula
24470 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24471 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24476 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24477 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24478 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24480 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24482 \begin_inset space ~
24490 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24494 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24495 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24496 as the formula number:
24499 \begin_layout Standard
24500 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24503 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24510 \begin_layout Standard
24511 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24512 \begin_inset space ~
24516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24518 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24523 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24531 \begin_layout Section
24532 User defined math macros
24533 \begin_inset Index idx
24536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24545 \begin_layout Standard
24546 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24547 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24548 Math macros are explained in section
24551 \begin_inset space ~
24563 \begin_layout Section
24567 \begin_layout Subsection
24569 \begin_inset Index idx
24572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24581 \begin_layout Standard
24582 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24583 To set a font in a formula, use the
24586 \begin_inset space ~
24596 arg "math-insert \\font"
24601 , or enter its command, listed in table
24602 \begin_inset space ~
24606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24608 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24615 \begin_layout Standard
24616 \begin_inset Float table
24621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24622 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24627 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24631 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24641 \begin_inset Tabular
24642 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24643 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24645 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24677 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24704 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24731 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24764 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24791 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24818 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24852 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24879 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24913 \begin_layout Standard
24914 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24922 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24938 \begin_layout Standard
24939 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24940 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24945 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24946 space when you need a space in the box.
24947 Here is an example where
24948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24959 denotes the set of numbers:
24960 \begin_inset Formula
24962 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
24970 \begin_layout Standard
24971 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24972 You can, for example, put a character in
24981 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24985 \begin_inset Newline newline
24988 So it is better not to use this feature.
24991 \begin_layout Standard
24992 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24993 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24997 \begin_inset Newline newline
25000 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25006 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25007 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25013 \begin_layout Standard
25020 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25023 \begin_layout Standard
25024 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25026 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25027 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25029 \begin_inset space ~
25037 \begin_layout Subsection
25039 \begin_inset Index idx
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25051 \begin_layout Standard
25052 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25054 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25058 \begin_inset space ~
25062 \begin_inset space ~
25070 \begin_inset space ~
25080 arg "math-insert \\font"
25092 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25093 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25094 Here is an example:
25095 \begin_inset Formula
25098 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25099 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25108 \begin_layout Subsection
25110 \begin_inset Index idx
25113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25122 \begin_layout Standard
25123 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25124 automatically chosen in most situations.
25142 For most characters,
25150 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25151 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25156 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25157 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25159 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25164 arg "math-insert \\style"
25170 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25171 For example, you can set
25172 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25175 , which is normally in
25184 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25188 The four styles are used in the following example:
25191 \begin_layout Standard
25192 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25196 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25200 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25204 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25210 \begin_layout Standard
25211 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25212 is set in a particular size with the menu
25214 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25216 \begin_inset space ~
25221 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25222 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25223 will be adjusted to correspond.
25224 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25235 \begin_layout Standard
25239 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25245 \begin_layout Section
25247 \begin_inset Index idx
25250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25257 \begin_inset Index idx
25260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25269 \begin_layout Standard
25270 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25271 (AMS) that are in common use.
25274 \begin_layout Subsection
25275 Enabling AMS-Support
25278 \begin_layout Standard
25279 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25280 the document by selecting the checkbox
25283 \begin_inset space ~
25287 \begin_inset space ~
25291 \begin_inset space ~
25298 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25302 \begin_inset Index idx
25305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25306 Document ! Settings
25314 \begin_inset space ~
25320 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25321 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25324 \begin_layout Subsection
25326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25328 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25333 \begin_inset Index idx
25336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25337 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25345 \begin_layout Standard
25346 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25347 LyX allows you to choose between
25368 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25369 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25375 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25378 \begin_layout Chapter
25382 \begin_layout Section
25384 \begin_inset Index idx
25387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25396 name "sec:Cross-References"
25403 \begin_layout Standard
25404 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25405 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25407 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25408 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25409 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25412 \begin_layout Enumerate
25416 \begin_layout Enumerate
25417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25419 name "enu:Second-item"
25426 \begin_layout Enumerate
25430 \begin_layout Standard
25431 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25433 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25436 or by pressing the toolbar button
25443 A gray label box like this:
25444 \begin_inset Graphics
25445 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25450 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25451 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25486 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25487 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25503 \begin_layout Standard
25504 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25506 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25509 or the toolbar button
25512 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25516 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25517 \begin_inset Graphics
25518 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25523 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25525 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25538 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25542 \begin_layout Standard
25543 As an alternative to
25545 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25548 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25553 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25554 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25556 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25568 \begin_layout Standard
25569 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25570 \begin_inset space ~
25574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25576 reference "enu:Second-item"
25583 \begin_layout Standard
25584 It is recommended to use a protected space
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25589 described in section
25590 \begin_inset space ~
25594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25596 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25605 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25606 line breaks between them.
25609 \begin_layout Standard
25610 There are six formats of cross-references:
25613 \begin_layout Description
25614 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25617 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25624 \begin_layout Description
25625 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25626 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25638 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25645 \begin_layout Description
25646 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25647 \begin_inset space ~
25651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25652 LatexCommand pageref
25653 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25660 \begin_layout Description
25662 \begin_inset space ~
25666 \begin_inset space ~
25669 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25671 LatexCommand vpageref
25672 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25677 \begin_inset Newline newline
25680 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25681 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25682 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25683 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25684 it prints “on the next page”.
25685 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25688 \begin_layout Description
25690 \begin_inset space ~
25694 \begin_inset space ~
25698 \begin_inset space ~
25701 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25704 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25709 \begin_inset Newline newline
25712 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25718 ; otherwise it behaves like
25722 \begin_inset space ~
25726 \begin_inset space ~
25735 \begin_layout Description
25737 \begin_inset space ~
25740 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25741 \begin_inset Newline newline
25745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25753 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25762 \begin_inset Index idx
25765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25766 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25772 \begin_inset Index idx
25775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25776 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25787 \begin_inset Newline newline
25790 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25793 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25797 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25798 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25806 is the default and preferred because
25810 supports only English documents.
25811 The format is specified by using the command
25823 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25824 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25837 ) can be done with this command
25838 \begin_inset Newline newline
25845 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25850 \begin_inset Newline newline
25853 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25855 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25857 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25864 \begin_layout Description
25866 \begin_inset space ~
25869 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25871 LatexCommand nameref
25872 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25879 \begin_layout Standard
25880 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25881 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
25882 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25886 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
25890 \begin_layout Standard
25891 You can only use the style
25895 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25899 is always possible.
25902 \begin_layout Standard
25903 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25904 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25906 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25907 \begin_inset space ~
25911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25913 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25920 \begin_layout Standard
25921 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25925 \begin_inset space ~
25929 \begin_inset space ~
25934 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25935 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25938 \begin_inset space ~
25943 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25944 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25947 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25953 \begin_layout Standard
25954 You can change labels at any time.
25955 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25956 do not need to think about this.
25959 \begin_layout Standard
25960 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
25961 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
25962 instead of the reference.
25965 \begin_layout Standard
25966 References are described in detail in the section
25967 \begin_inset space ~
25971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25981 \begin_inset space ~
25989 \begin_layout Section
25990 Table of Contents and other Listings
25991 \begin_inset Index idx
25994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26001 \begin_inset Index idx
26004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26020 \begin_layout Subsection
26022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26024 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26031 \begin_layout Standard
26032 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26034 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26035 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26037 \begin_inset space ~
26041 \begin_inset space ~
26047 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26048 If you click on it, the
26052 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26053 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26054 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26056 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26058 \begin_inset space ~
26063 that is described in section
26064 \begin_inset space ~
26068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26070 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26077 \begin_layout Standard
26078 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26079 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26081 \begin_inset space ~
26085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26087 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26091 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26093 \begin_inset space ~
26097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26099 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26103 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26105 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26108 \begin_layout Subsection
26109 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26112 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26119 \begin_layout Standard
26120 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26121 You can insert them via the
26123 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26127 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26130 \begin_layout Section
26131 URLs and Hyperlinks
26132 \begin_inset Index idx
26135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26142 \begin_inset Index idx
26145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26154 \begin_layout Subsection
26156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26165 \begin_layout Standard
26166 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26168 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26174 \begin_layout Standard
26175 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26176 \begin_inset Flex URL
26179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26189 \begin_layout Standard
26190 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26196 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26200 \begin_layout Standard
26201 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26209 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26217 \begin_layout Subsection
26219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26221 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26228 \begin_layout Standard
26229 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26231 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26234 or with the toolbar button
26241 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26250 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26251 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26252 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26254 name "LyX's homepage"
26255 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26259 , an Email address like this:
26260 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26262 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26263 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26268 , or a link to a file.
26271 \begin_layout Standard
26272 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26285 to the link target.
26288 \begin_layout Standard
26289 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26290 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26291 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26292 the text style dialog.
26293 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26297 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26299 name "LyX's homepage"
26300 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26307 \begin_layout Standard
26308 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26312 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26314 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26315 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26319 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26321 \begin_inset Newline newline
26329 \begin_inset Newline newline
26336 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26339 \begin_layout Section
26341 \begin_inset Index idx
26344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26353 name "sec:Appendices"
26360 \begin_layout Standard
26361 Appendices are created with the menu
26363 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26365 \begin_inset space ~
26369 \begin_inset space ~
26375 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26376 as the appendix part of the book.
26377 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26380 \begin_layout Standard
26381 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26382 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26383 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26384 and the subsection number.
26385 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26389 \begin_layout Standard
26391 \begin_inset space ~
26395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26397 reference "chap:Credits"
26402 \begin_inset space ~
26406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26408 reference "sub:Export"
26415 \begin_layout Section
26417 \begin_inset Index idx
26420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26429 name "sec:Bibliography"
26436 \begin_layout Standard
26437 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26438 You can include a bibliography database,
26442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26443 Known under the name
26444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26456 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26457 manually, using the paragraph environment
26461 , which was described in section
26462 \begin_inset space ~
26466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26468 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26473 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26474 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26478 use a bibliography database.
26481 \begin_layout Subsection
26482 The Bibliography Environment
26485 \begin_layout Standard
26490 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26492 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26501 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26503 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26512 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26515 \begin_layout Standard
26516 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26518 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26521 or the toolbar button
26524 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26528 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26529 containing the available citations.
26530 Select one or more keys from the list and
26540 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26541 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26545 \begin_layout Standard
26546 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26547 entry with surrounding brackets.
26552 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26553 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26565 \begin_layout Standard
26568 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26571 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26573 key "latexcompanion"
26580 \begin_layout Standard
26581 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26582 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26591 \begin_layout Standard
26592 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26595 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26597 \begin_inset space ~
26605 arg "layout-paragraph"
26609 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26612 \begin_layout Subsection
26613 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26614 \begin_inset Index idx
26617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26618 Bibliography ! Databases
26624 \begin_inset Index idx
26627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26628 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26636 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26643 \begin_layout Standard
26644 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26652 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26653 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26658 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26660 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26661 your working field in a database.
26662 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26663 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26664 list for that document.
26665 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26669 \begin_layout Standard
26670 The database is a text file with the file extension
26671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26682 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26683 The format is explained in
26684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26690 and in the LaTeX books (
26691 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26693 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26698 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26699 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26700 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26701 \begin_inset Flex URL
26704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26706 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26714 \begin_layout Standard
26715 To use a database, use the menu
26717 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26722 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26735 \begin_inset space ~
26741 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26742 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26749 Add bibliography to TOC
26751 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26756 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26757 in the document or just the cited references.
26760 \begin_layout Standard
26761 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26773 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26774 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26775 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26777 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26783 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26784 \begin_inset Newline newline
26788 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26790 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26802 \begin_layout Standard
26803 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26806 \begin_layout Standard
26807 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26808 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
26814 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26815 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26820 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26821 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26822 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26837 The following variants are possible:
26840 \begin_layout Description
26841 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26842 with other bibliography packages (e.
26843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26847 \begin_inset space \space{}
26854 ), only with the package
26858 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26862 \begin_layout Description
26863 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26864 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26865 with all bibliography packages, except
26870 \begin_layout Description
26871 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
26876 , works with all bibliography packages
26879 \begin_layout Standard
26880 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26882 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
26888 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26897 \begin_layout Standard
26898 When you select the option
26900 Sectioned bibliography
26904 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26905 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26908 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26909 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26911 Customizing Bibliographies
26919 Additional Features
26924 \begin_layout Standard
26925 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26926 the two methods of creating them.
26927 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26928 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26929 We used the style file
26933 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26936 \begin_layout Subsection
26937 Bibliography layout
26938 \begin_inset Index idx
26941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26942 Bibliography ! Layout
26950 \begin_layout Standard
26951 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26952 For this feature you need to enable the option
26958 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26962 \begin_inset Index idx
26965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 Document ! Settings
26976 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26977 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
26978 in the previous section.
26981 \begin_layout Standard
26982 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26983 the citation reference window.
26984 Here is an example where the text
26985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26989 \begin_inset space ~
26993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26996 appears after the reference:
26999 \begin_layout Standard
27001 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27004 key "latexcompanion"
27011 \begin_layout Section
27013 \begin_inset Index idx
27016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27032 \begin_layout Standard
27033 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27035 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27037 \begin_inset space ~
27042 or the toolbar button
27049 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27050 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27051 by LyX as the index entry.
27054 \begin_layout Standard
27055 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27057 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27058 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27060 \begin_inset space ~
27066 A light blue box labeled
27067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27078 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27079 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27082 \begin_layout Standard
27083 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27084 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27086 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27088 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27095 \begin_layout Subsection
27096 Grouping Index Entries
27097 \begin_inset Index idx
27100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27109 \begin_layout Standard
27110 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27112 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27113 lists under the entry
27114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27122 First we create the entry
27123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27131 \begin_inset space ~
27135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27137 reference "sub:Lists"
27142 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27143 \begin_inset space ~
27147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27149 reference "sec:Itemize"
27153 , we insert the command
27156 \begin_layout Standard
27162 \begin_layout Standard
27166 \begin_layout Standard
27172 \begin_layout Standard
27173 for the enumerated list in section
27174 \begin_inset space ~
27178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27180 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27187 \begin_layout Standard
27188 The exclamation mark
27189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27196 marks the grouping levels.
27197 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27198 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27199 If we don't have an index entry for
27200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27207 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27210 \begin_layout Subsection
27212 \begin_inset Index idx
27215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27216 Index ! Page ranges
27224 \begin_layout Standard
27225 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27227 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27228 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27229 an index entry in section
27230 \begin_inset space ~
27234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27236 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27243 \begin_layout Standard
27246 Paragraph environments|(
27249 \begin_layout Standard
27250 and another entry at the end of section
27251 \begin_inset space ~
27255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27257 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27264 \begin_layout Standard
27267 Paragraph environments|)
27270 \begin_layout Standard
27272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27295 respectively start and end the index range.
27296 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27297 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27298 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27299 An example is the index entry
27300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27303 Document ! Settings
27304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27310 \begin_layout Subsection
27312 \begin_inset Index idx
27315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27316 Index ! Cross referencing
27324 \begin_layout Standard
27325 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27326 We referred for example in the index entry
27327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27335 \begin_inset space ~
27339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27341 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27345 ) to the index entry
27346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27353 in the same section using the entry
27356 \begin_layout Standard
27359 GIF|see{Image formats}
27362 \begin_layout Standard
27363 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27364 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27365 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27368 \begin_layout Subsection
27370 \begin_inset Index idx
27373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 Index ! Entry order
27382 \begin_layout Standard
27383 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27384 follow the rules for the index order.
27385 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27390 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27392 \begin_inset space ~
27396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27398 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27407 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27408 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27433 \begin_inset Index idx
27436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27437 Dummy entries ! maïs
27443 \begin_inset Index idx
27446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 Dummy entries ! maître
27453 \begin_inset Index idx
27456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27457 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27462 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27463 maïs, maison, maître.
27464 To achieve this, we use the command
27467 \begin_layout Standard
27470 previous entry@current entry
27473 \begin_layout Standard
27474 In our case we want to have
27475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27490 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27493 \begin_layout Standard
27499 \begin_layout Standard
27500 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27501 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27502 See the next subsection for an example.
27505 \begin_layout Standard
27506 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27512 \begin_layout Standard
27513 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27518 to generate the index (see sec.
27519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27525 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27534 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27542 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27546 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27547 index commands start with
27548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27560 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27565 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27568 \begin_layout Standard
27580 \begin_layout Standard
27592 \begin_layout Subsection
27594 \begin_inset Index idx
27597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27598 Index ! Entry layout
27606 \begin_layout Standard
27607 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27608 \begin_inset Index idx
27611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27614 This is an italic dummy entry
27619 You can also format the page number using the character
27620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27627 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27628 We can write for example
27631 \begin_layout Standard
27634 italic page number:|textit
27637 \begin_layout Standard
27638 to get the page number in italic.
27639 \begin_inset Index idx
27642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27643 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27648 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27666 \begin_inset space ~
27672 Have a look at section
27673 \begin_inset space ~
27677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27679 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27683 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27686 \begin_layout Standard
27687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27695 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27699 to generate the index, see sec.
27700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27706 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27715 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27720 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27721 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27724 key "latexcompanion"
27736 \begin_layout Standard
27737 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27739 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27740 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27741 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27742 If so, put the following in the preamble
27745 \begin_layout Standard
27757 \begin_layout Standard
27761 \begin_layout Standard
27767 \begin_layout Standard
27768 in the index entry.
27769 \begin_inset Index idx
27772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27773 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27778 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27779 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27780 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27783 \begin_layout Standard
27784 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27785 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27786 a bold font for all index entries.
27787 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27799 documentation for details,
27800 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27802 key "makeindex,xindy"
27809 \begin_layout Subsection
27811 \begin_inset Index idx
27814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27823 name "sub:Index-Program"
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27831 If the index generation program
27835 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27839 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27848 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27849 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27850 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27851 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27852 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27862 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
27863 dialog, see section
27864 \begin_inset space ~
27868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27870 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
27875 The available options are listed and explained in
27876 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27878 key "makeindex,xindy"
27883 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27887 \begin_layout Standard
27888 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27889 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
27892 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27893 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27897 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27898 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27901 \begin_layout Subsection
27905 \begin_layout Standard
27906 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27907 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27915 next to the standard index.
27916 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27917 that add this feature.
27923 \begin_inset Index idx
27926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27927 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
27932 package to generate multiple indexes.
27933 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
27937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27938 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
27939 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27946 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
27947 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27948 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27956 \begin_layout Standard
27957 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27959 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27960 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27963 and select the option
27965 Use multiple Indexes
27972 already contains the standard index
27973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27981 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27982 also appear as a heading) to the
27986 input field and press the
27991 The new index now also appears in the list.
27992 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
27996 \begin_layout Standard
27997 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28000 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28007 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28008 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28009 are additional features:
28012 \begin_layout Itemize
28013 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28014 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28017 \begin_layout Itemize
28018 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28019 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28027 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28028 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28029 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28030 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28033 \begin_layout Section
28034 Nomenclature/Glossary
28035 \begin_inset Index idx
28038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28045 \begin_inset Index idx
28048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28079 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28086 \begin_layout Standard
28087 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28088 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28089 called nomenclature or glossary.
28092 \begin_layout Standard
28093 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28099 \begin_inset Index idx
28102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28103 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28109 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28110 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28116 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28119 \begin_layout Standard
28120 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28121 and then use the menu
28123 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28129 \begin_inset space ~
28134 or the toolbar button
28137 arg "nomencl-insert"
28142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28153 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28156 \begin_layout Standard
28157 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28158 The first is the term or
28162 that you wish to define.
28167 of the term or symbol.
28170 \begin_layout Standard
28171 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28179 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28187 \begin_layout Subsection
28188 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28189 \begin_inset Index idx
28192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28193 Nomenclature ! Layout
28201 \begin_layout Standard
28202 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28206 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28212 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28220 \begin_inset Newline newline
28228 \begin_inset Newline newline
28234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28241 character starts/ends the formula.
28242 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28254 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28264 \begin_layout Standard
28265 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28266 \begin_inset space ~
28270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28272 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28279 \begin_layout Standard
28283 \begin_inset space ~
28288 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28289 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28294 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28301 in this document is:
28302 \begin_inset Newline newline
28307 dummy entry for the character
28312 \begin_inset Newline newline
28324 \begin_inset space ~
28334 font use the command
28363 \begin_layout Standard
28364 If the characters |
28365 \begin_inset space \space{}
28369 \begin_inset space \space{}
28373 \begin_inset space \space{}
28377 \begin_inset space \space{}
28381 \begin_inset space \space{}
28384 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28385 a quote character in front of them.
28386 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28387 LatexCommand nomenclature
28388 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28389 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28396 \begin_layout Subsection
28397 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28398 \begin_inset Index idx
28401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28402 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28410 \begin_layout Standard
28411 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28412 the symbol definition.
28413 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28415 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28418 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28419 LatexCommand nomenclature
28421 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28428 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28432 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28433 LatexCommand nomenclature
28436 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28441 They will be sorted by
28442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28468 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28471 will be sorted before the
28475 since the character
28476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28483 is considered in sorting.
28486 \begin_layout Standard
28487 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28490 \begin_inset space ~
28495 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28496 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28498 For the example given, you can insert
28502 in this field for the
28503 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28510 will be located before
28511 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28517 \begin_layout Standard
28518 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28523 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28532 \begin_layout Subsection
28533 Nomenclature Options
28534 \begin_inset Index idx
28537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28538 Nomenclature ! Options
28546 \begin_layout Standard
28551 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28552 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28555 \begin_layout Description
28556 refeq Appends the phrase
28557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28572 to every nomenclature entry, where
28578 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28581 \begin_layout Description
28582 refpage Appends the phrase
28583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28598 to every nomenclature entry, where
28604 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28607 \begin_layout Description
28608 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28611 \begin_layout Standard
28612 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28613 class options list in the
28615 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28619 In this document the options
28626 \begin_layout Standard
28627 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28633 \begin_layout Standard
28634 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28635 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28640 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28643 \begin_layout Description
28653 \begin_layout Description
28656 nomrefpage Like the
28663 \begin_layout Description
28666 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28675 \begin_layout Description
28679 \begin_inset space ~
28685 \begin_inset space ~
28690 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28693 \begin_layout Standard
28695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28702 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28703 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28706 \begin_layout Standard
28714 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28717 \begin_inset Newline newline
28724 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28729 \begin_inset Newline newline
28733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28748 by their translation.
28751 \begin_layout Subsection
28752 Printing the Nomenclature
28753 \begin_inset Index idx
28756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28757 Nomenclature ! Printing
28765 \begin_layout Standard
28766 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28768 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28769 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28785 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28786 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28787 You can choose between these settings:
28790 \begin_layout Description
28791 Default a space of 1
28792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28798 \begin_layout Description
28800 \begin_inset space ~
28804 \begin_inset space ~
28807 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28810 \begin_layout Description
28811 Custom custom space
28814 \begin_layout Standard
28815 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28824 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28832 For example, in order to change the name to
28836 , add the following line to the preamble:
28839 \begin_layout Standard
28847 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28850 \begin_layout Subsection
28851 Nomenclature Program
28852 \begin_inset Index idx
28855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28856 Nomenclature ! Program
28862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28864 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
28871 \begin_layout Standard
28872 LyX uses the program
28876 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28877 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28882 by adding options, see section
28883 \begin_inset space ~
28887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28889 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28894 The available options are listed and explained in
28895 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28897 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28904 \begin_layout Section
28906 \begin_inset Index idx
28909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28916 \begin_inset Index idx
28919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28920 Document ! Branches
28926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28928 name "sec:Branches"
28935 \begin_layout Standard
28936 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28937 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28938 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28939 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28942 \begin_layout Standard
28943 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
28944 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28945 To create a branch, either select the menu
28947 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28948 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28951 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28953 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28960 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28961 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28962 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
28963 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28964 (see below for an example).
28965 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28966 to the name of the other) and to add
28967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28979 \begin_inset space ~
28982 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28983 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28986 \begin_layout Standard
28987 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28988 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28990 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28993 where you can choose a branch.
28994 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28998 \begin_layout Standard
28999 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29000 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29003 \begin_layout Standard
29004 \begin_inset Branch Question
29007 \begin_layout Standard
29008 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29016 \begin_layout Standard
29017 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29020 \begin_layout Standard
29021 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29029 \begin_layout Standard
29036 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29037 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29040 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29041 Consider for example a file
29042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29049 which has the above branches.
29051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29058 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29082 branch were inactive,
29083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29098 branch was active, likewise
29099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29114 branch was active, and
29115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29118 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29122 if both branches were active.
29123 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29126 \begin_layout Standard
29127 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29133 \begin_layout Standard
29134 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29135 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29137 For example you can define for the question branch
29141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29142 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29143 \begin_inset space ~
29147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29149 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29161 \begin_layout Standard
29171 \begin_layout Standard
29181 \begin_layout Standard
29182 and for the answer branch
29185 \begin_layout Standard
29195 \begin_layout Standard
29205 \begin_layout Standard
29206 \begin_inset Branch Question
29209 \begin_layout Standard
29213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29241 \begin_layout Standard
29242 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29245 \begin_layout Standard
29249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29277 \begin_layout Standard
29278 Now it is possible to use the
29282 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29289 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29292 commands to obtain conditional output.
29293 Here is an example formula where only the
29300 \begin_inset Formula
29302 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29310 \begin_layout Standard
29311 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29320 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29326 \begin_inset space \space{}
29329 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29330 For this advanced usage, see the
29335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29338 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29345 \begin_layout Section
29347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29349 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29354 \begin_inset Index idx
29357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29366 \begin_layout Standard
29369 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29370 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29373 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29375 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29380 \begin_inset Index idx
29383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29384 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29389 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29390 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29391 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29392 part of the document.
29396 \begin_layout Standard
29397 The header information in the dialog tab
29401 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29402 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29403 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29404 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29408 \begin_inset space ~
29412 \begin_inset space ~
29417 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29418 title and author entries.
29422 \begin_inset space ~
29426 \begin_inset space ~
29430 \begin_inset space ~
29435 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29438 \begin_layout Standard
29439 You can specify in the dialog tab
29443 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29448 \begin_inset space ~
29452 \begin_inset space ~
29456 \begin_inset space ~
29461 option allows long links to be split;
29464 \begin_inset space ~
29468 \begin_inset space ~
29472 \begin_inset space ~
29480 \begin_inset space ~
29485 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29488 \begin_inset space ~
29493 colors the different links.
29494 The default colors are:
29497 \begin_layout Labeling
29498 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29503 for hyperlinks and URLs
29506 \begin_layout Labeling
29507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29515 \begin_layout Labeling
29516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29524 \begin_layout Standard
29525 but you can change these in the field
29530 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29533 \begin_layout Standard
29536 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29539 \begin_layout Standard
29544 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29545 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29546 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29549 \begin_layout Standard
29554 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29555 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29556 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29566 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29567 when opening the PDF.
29569 \begin_inset space ~
29572 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29573 \begin_inset space ~
29576 1 will only display the sections.
29579 \begin_layout Standard
29580 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29581 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29587 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29597 \begin_layout Section
29598 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29601 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29608 \begin_layout Subsection
29610 \begin_inset Index idx
29613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29622 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29629 \begin_layout Standard
29630 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29631 constructs, but not all.
29632 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29633 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29634 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29635 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29636 and their commands.
29639 \begin_layout Standard
29640 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29642 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29644 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29657 \begin_inset space ~
29662 or by the toolbar button
29675 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29683 \begin_layout Standard
29684 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29685 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29686 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29687 using the LaTeX-command
29693 , you can write the command part
29699 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29703 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29704 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29705 the following example:
29708 \begin_layout Standard
29709 \begin_inset Graphics
29710 filename clipart/ERT.png
29718 \begin_layout Standard
29722 \begin_layout Standard
29723 This is a line with a
29727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29750 \begin_layout Standard
29751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29759 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29760 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29768 \begin_layout Subsection
29769 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29770 \begin_inset Argument 1
29773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29780 \begin_inset Index idx
29783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29792 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29799 \begin_layout Standard
29800 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29801 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29802 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29811 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29812 any time if you know the right commands.
29813 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29814 is the end of the day.
29815 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29816 all caption labels bold.
29817 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29819 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29823 \begin_layout Standard
29824 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29825 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29826 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
29828 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29837 \begin_layout Standard
29838 As result you find that the package
29843 \begin_inset Index idx
29846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29847 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29853 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29855 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29858 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
29865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29873 \begin_inset space ~
29881 \begin_layout Standard
29886 usepackage[options]{package name}
29889 \begin_layout Standard
29890 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29891 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29892 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29895 \begin_layout Standard
29896 In your case the package name is
29901 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29906 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29907 So you add the command
29910 \begin_layout Standard
29915 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29918 \begin_layout Standard
29919 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29924 For more commands provided by the
29928 package, have a look at its documentation,
29929 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29943 \begin_layout Standard
29944 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29946 For example if you use a
29950 class, you don't need the package
29954 , you can instead write
29957 \begin_layout Standard
29962 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29967 \begin_layout Standard
29968 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29969 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29970 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29977 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29980 \begin_layout Standard
29981 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29982 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29984 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
29985 the previous section.
29988 \begin_layout Standard
29989 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
29991 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29993 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30000 \begin_layout Standard
30001 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30007 \begin_layout Standard
30011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30021 \begin_inset Note Note
30024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30025 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30033 \begin_layout Left Header
30034 \begin_inset Argument 1
30037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30057 \begin_inset Note Note
30060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30061 defines the header line as described below
30069 \begin_layout Center Header
30070 \begin_inset Argument 1
30073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30082 \begin_layout Right Header
30083 \begin_inset Argument 1
30086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30107 \begin_layout Left Footer
30108 \begin_inset Argument 1
30111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30132 \begin_layout Center Footer
30133 \begin_inset Argument 1
30136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30147 \begin_inset Newline newline
30151 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30157 \begin_layout Right Footer
30158 \begin_inset Argument 1
30161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30183 \begin_layout Section
30184 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30187 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30192 \begin_inset Index idx
30195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30196 Document ! Header/Footer line
30202 \begin_inset Index idx
30205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30214 \begin_layout Standard
30215 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30219 \begin_inset space ~
30230 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30236 \begin_inset space ~
30242 As a second step add in the menu
30244 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30245 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30252 Custom Header/Footerlines
30253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30257 This module offers the following 6
30258 \begin_inset space ~
30264 \begin_layout Description
30266 \begin_inset space ~
30270 \begin_inset space ~
30274 \begin_inset space ~
30278 \begin_inset space ~
30282 \begin_inset space ~
30288 \begin_layout Description
30290 \begin_inset space ~
30294 \begin_inset space ~
30298 \begin_inset space ~
30302 \begin_inset space ~
30306 \begin_inset space ~
30312 \begin_layout Standard
30313 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30316 \begin_layout Standard
30317 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30318 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30320 \begin_inset space ~
30324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30326 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30330 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30333 \begin_layout Standard
30334 \begin_inset Float figure
30340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30343 \begin_inset Tabular
30344 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30345 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30346 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30347 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30348 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30350 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30368 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30379 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30397 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30408 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30412 The normal text on the page goes here.
30413 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30415 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30416 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30421 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30430 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30441 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30459 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30470 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30488 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30506 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30511 name "fig:Page-layout"
30515 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30528 \begin_layout Standard
30529 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30537 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30541 \begin_inset space ~
30546 is set to “Default”.
30547 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30556 \begin_layout Subsection
30560 \begin_layout Standard
30561 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30562 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30563 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30564 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30566 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30567 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30570 \begin_layout Standard
30571 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30574 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30587 \begin_inset space ~
30595 \begin_layout Description
30598 thepage prints the current page number
30601 \begin_layout Description
30604 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30607 \begin_layout Description
30610 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30613 \begin_layout Description
30616 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30617 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30624 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30627 because it usually goes in a left header.
30630 \begin_layout Description
30633 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30634 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30636 It is normally used in the right header.
30639 \begin_layout Subsection
30640 Default header/footer
30643 \begin_layout Standard
30644 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30645 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30646 footer has the page number.
30647 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30648 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30649 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30652 \begin_inset space ~
30660 \begin_layout Subsection
30664 \begin_layout Standard
30665 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30666 Some pages are different.
30667 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30668 a new part or chapter in your book.
30669 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30670 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30671 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30675 Header and footer decoration line
30678 \begin_layout Standard
30679 By default, you get a 0.4
30680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30683 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30684 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30696 in the following way:
30699 \begin_layout Standard
30706 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30709 \begin_layout Standard
30710 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30719 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30726 \begin_layout Standard
30727 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30728 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30729 \begin_inset space ~
30733 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30743 Several header/footer lines
30746 \begin_layout Standard
30747 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30748 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30749 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30751 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30765 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30766 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30779 \begin_inset space ~
30787 \begin_layout Standard
30794 headheight}{height}
30797 \begin_layout Standard
30798 where height is a size in standard units.
30799 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30800 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30801 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
30803 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30820 \begin_inset space ~
30825 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30830 \begin_inset Index idx
30833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30834 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30840 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30841 for your header/footer.
30844 \begin_layout Subsection
30848 \begin_layout Standard
30849 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30850 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30851 This example consists of the following definition:
30854 \begin_layout Description
30856 \begin_inset space ~
30865 , empty optional argument
30868 \begin_layout Description
30870 \begin_inset space ~
30873 Header empty, empty optional argument
30876 \begin_layout Description
30878 \begin_inset space ~
30887 in the optional argument
30890 \begin_layout Description
30892 \begin_inset space ~
30901 in the optional argument
30904 \begin_layout Description
30906 \begin_inset space ~
30918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30922 \begin_inset Newline newline
30926 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30933 in the optional argument
30936 \begin_layout Description
30938 \begin_inset space ~
30947 , empty optional argument
30950 \begin_layout Description
30953 headrulewidth set to 2
30954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30960 \begin_layout Standard
30961 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30962 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
30968 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30977 \begin_layout Standard
30978 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30984 \begin_layout Standard
30988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30992 pagestyle{headings}
30998 \begin_inset Note Note
31001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31002 switches back to page style with the default headings
31010 \begin_layout Section
31011 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31014 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31019 \begin_inset Index idx
31022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31029 \begin_inset Index idx
31032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31041 \begin_layout Standard
31042 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31043 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31044 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31047 \begin_layout Subsection
31051 \begin_layout Standard
31052 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31057 \begin_inset Index idx
31060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31061 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31066 (on some systems named simply
31071 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31073 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31079 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31080 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31088 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31089 automatically installed together with LyX.
31092 \begin_layout Subsection
31096 \begin_layout Standard
31097 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31098 LaTeX, activate the option
31101 \begin_inset space ~
31108 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31114 \begin_inset space ~
31118 \begin_inset space ~
31121 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31128 \begin_inset space ~
31141 \begin_inset space ~
31146 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31149 \begin_layout Standard
31150 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31154 \begin_inset space ~
31162 \begin_inset space ~
31170 \begin_layout Standard
31171 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31175 \begin_layout Standard
31176 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31184 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31185 generated by activating the option
31188 \begin_inset space ~
31194 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31202 \begin_layout Subsection
31203 Selected document parts
31206 \begin_layout Standard
31207 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31208 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31209 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31210 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31212 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31216 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31217 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31218 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31221 \begin_layout Standard
31222 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31228 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31239 is explained in section
31241 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31246 \begin_inset space ~
31256 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31257 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31259 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31261 Here is the result:
31264 \begin_layout Standard
31265 \begin_inset Preview
31267 \begin_layout Standard
31272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31276 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31282 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31292 height_special "totalheight"
31295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31320 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31326 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31348 \begin_layout Standard
31349 Previewing works also for colors.
31350 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31368 is explained in section
31375 \begin_inset space ~
31388 \begin_layout Standard
31389 \begin_inset Preview
31391 \begin_layout Standard
31395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31414 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31419 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31438 \begin_layout Standard
31439 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31445 \begin_layout Standard
31446 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31447 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31448 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31450 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31451 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31452 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31453 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31457 \begin_layout Subsection
31461 \begin_layout Standard
31462 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31465 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31467 \begin_inset space ~
31472 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31473 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31475 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31476 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31477 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31478 the source view window.
31483 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31484 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31485 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31488 \begin_layout Section
31489 Advanced Find and Replace
31490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31492 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31497 \begin_inset Index idx
31500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31507 \begin_inset Index idx
31510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31519 \begin_layout Subsection
31523 \begin_layout Standard
31524 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31525 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31526 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31527 The key-features are:
31530 \begin_layout Itemize
31531 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31532 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31533 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31537 \begin_layout Itemize
31538 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31539 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31540 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31541 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31544 \begin_layout Itemize
31545 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31546 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31547 outside of mathematics environments
31550 \begin_layout Itemize
31551 Search may be widened to a specific
31556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31560 \begin_inset space ~
31563 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31564 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31571 \begin_layout Itemize
31572 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31573 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31578 \begin_inset space ~
31581 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31584 \begin_layout Subsection
31588 \begin_layout Standard
31589 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31591 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31604 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31607 ) or the toolbar button
31610 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31616 Advanced Find and Replace
31621 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31625 \begin_layout Standard
31630 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31634 \begin_inset space ~
31639 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31642 arg "break-paragraph"
31646 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31647 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31651 arg "break-paragraph"
31654 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31658 searches backwards.
31661 \begin_layout Standard
31665 \begin_inset space ~
31670 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31679 \begin_inset space ~
31684 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31688 Searching for mathematics
31691 \begin_layout Standard
31692 Mathematical formulas, such as
31693 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31696 or something more complex like
31697 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31700 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31705 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31706 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31707 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31708 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31718 \begin_layout Standard
31719 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31720 This is done by switching to the
31724 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31729 This way, entering in the
31736 \begin_layout Itemize
31737 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31738 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31741 \begin_layout Itemize
31742 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31743 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31746 \begin_layout Itemize
31747 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31748 of it only within section headings.
31749 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31750 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31754 \begin_layout Itemize
31755 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31756 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31759 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31763 \begin_layout Standard
31764 The entries made in the
31768 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31771 \begin_inset space ~
31777 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31781 button or alternatively press
31784 arg "break-paragraph"
31791 while the cursor is in the
31794 \begin_inset space ~
31802 \begin_layout Standard
31803 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
31804 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31808 \begin_layout Itemize
31809 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31810 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31818 with its typewriter version
31819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31833 \begin_layout Itemize
31834 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31840 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31852 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31859 (you may want to enable the
31862 \begin_inset space ~
31870 \begin_inset space ~
31875 options and disable the
31883 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31891 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31892 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31896 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
31899 , or occurrences of
31900 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31904 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31910 \begin_layout Subsection
31914 \begin_layout Standard
31915 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31920 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31922 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31924 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31933 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31939 This is done with the context menu
31941 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31942 Insert Regular Expression
31944 while the cursor is in the
31949 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31950 expression matching rules
31954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31955 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
31957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31961 \begin_inset space ~
31964 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
31965 to match expressions.
31970 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31971 same text in the document.
31972 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
31973 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31976 \begin_layout Enumerate
31977 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31982 editor the fraction
31983 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31987 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31990 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31991 fractions with the given denominator.
31994 \begin_layout Enumerate
31995 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32007 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32012 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32013 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32014 Also, by inserting a
32015 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32018 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32019 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32022 \begin_layout Standard
32023 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32024 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32025 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32028 , and referring back to them through
32029 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32033 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32037 For example, try searching with the regexp
32038 \begin_inset Newline newline
32041 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32044 \begin_inset Newline newline
32047 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32050 \begin_layout Standard
32051 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32054 \begin_layout Standard
32055 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32063 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32064 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32065 sub-expressions is absolute.
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32071 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32074 always refers to the first occurrence of
32075 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32078 in all entered regexps.
32086 \begin_layout Section
32088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32090 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32095 \begin_inset Index idx
32098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32107 \begin_layout Standard
32108 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32111 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32118 key or the toolbar button
32121 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32124 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32125 beginning of the currently selected text.
32126 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32127 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32128 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32129 scrolled so that it is visible.
32130 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32131 n, if any could be found.
32132 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32136 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32137 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32140 \begin_layout Standard
32141 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32144 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32148 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32149 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32150 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32151 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32154 \begin_inset space ~
32162 arg "dialog-show character"
32165 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32166 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32169 \begin_layout Standard
32170 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32171 \begin_inset Newline newline
32175 \begin_inset Flex URL
32178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32180 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32186 \begin_inset Newline newline
32190 \begin_inset space ~
32193 files for each language.
32194 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32195 \begin_inset space ~
32198 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32207 \begin_inset Newline newline
32210 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32211 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32212 but in most cases these are
32228 is the language code.
32231 \begin_layout Subsection
32235 \begin_layout Standard
32238 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32239 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32241 \begin_inset space ~
32244 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32247 you can set the following things:
32250 \begin_layout Description
32252 \begin_inset space ~
32255 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32256 Depending on your platform,
32270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32271 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32272 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32287 \begin_layout Description
32289 \begin_inset space ~
32292 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32293 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32296 \begin_layout Description
32298 \begin_inset space ~
32301 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32307 \begin_inset space \space{}
32311 This should normally not be needed.
32314 \begin_layout Description
32316 \begin_inset space ~
32320 \begin_inset space ~
32323 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32335 \begin_layout Description
32337 \begin_inset space ~
32340 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32341 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32342 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32343 appear in a context menu.
32344 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32348 \begin_layout Description
32350 \begin_inset space ~
32354 \begin_inset space ~
32358 \begin_inset space ~
32361 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32365 \begin_layout Section
32367 \begin_inset Index idx
32370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32379 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32386 \begin_layout Standard
32387 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32388 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32398 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32400 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32409 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32410 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32411 which are available for many languages.
32414 \begin_layout Standard
32415 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32419 \begin_layout Subsection
32420 Setting up the thesaurus
32423 \begin_layout Standard
32432 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32436 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32441 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32447 \begin_inset space ~
32455 For instance, the US English files are named:
32458 \begin_layout Itemize
32462 \begin_layout Itemize
32466 \begin_layout Standard
32475 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32476 and you just need to point LyX (in
32478 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32479 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32480 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32482 \begin_inset space ~
32487 ) to the path where they are installed.
32491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32492 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32493 ies, typical locations are
32499 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32503 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32507 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32510 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32516 LibreOffice-<Version>
32523 On the Mac, the default location is
32525 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32526 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32527 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32528 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32529 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32530 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32538 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32539 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32540 correct place right away.
32543 \begin_layout Standard
32544 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32545 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32549 \begin_layout Itemize
32550 \begin_inset Flex URL
32553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32555 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32563 \begin_layout Standard
32564 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32565 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32567 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32568 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32569 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32571 \begin_inset space ~
32577 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32578 and point LyX there.
32581 \begin_layout Standard
32582 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32584 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32587 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32593 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32596 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32604 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32605 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32606 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32608 \begin_inset space ~
32613 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32616 \begin_layout Subsection
32617 Using the thesaurus
32620 \begin_layout Standard
32621 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32623 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32626 or the toolbar button
32629 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32632 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32634 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32636 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32637 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32638 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32647 ), related terms (such as
32650 \begin_inset space ~
32659 ), compounds (such as
32662 \begin_inset space ~
32671 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32680 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32683 \begin_layout Standard
32684 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32685 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32689 \begin_layout Standard
32690 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32691 the dictionary, such as the above
32695 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32700 \begin_inset space \space{}
32703 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32704 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32705 For example, looking up the word form
32709 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32714 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32719 \begin_inset space \space{}
32730 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32731 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32732 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32735 \begin_layout Section
32737 \begin_inset Index idx
32740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32747 \begin_inset Index idx
32750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32751 Document ! Change Tracking
32757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32759 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32766 \begin_layout Standard
32767 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32768 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32769 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32770 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32772 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32774 \begin_inset space ~
32777 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32779 \begin_inset space ~
32787 \begin_layout Standard
32788 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32802 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32803 You can change the color in
32805 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32806 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32808 \begin_inset space ~
32812 \begin_inset space ~
32817 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
32823 \begin_inset Index idx
32826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32827 Color ! Change tracking
32832 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32833 the cursor is in changed text.
32834 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32837 arg "changes-merge"
32843 \begin_layout Standard
32844 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32845 \begin_inset Index idx
32848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32857 \begin_layout Standard
32858 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32864 \begin_layout Standard
32865 \begin_inset Graphics
32866 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32874 \begin_layout Standard
32875 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32882 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
32885 \begin_layout Standard
32886 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32892 \begin_layout Standard
32893 \begin_inset Tabular
32894 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32895 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32896 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32897 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32907 arg "changes-track"
32915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32921 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32923 \begin_inset space ~
32926 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32928 \begin_inset space ~
32937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32946 arg "changes-output"
32954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32960 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32962 \begin_inset space ~
32965 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32967 \begin_inset space ~
32971 \begin_inset space ~
32975 \begin_inset space ~
32984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33005 Jumps to the next change
33011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33020 arg "change-accept"
33028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33034 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33036 \begin_inset space ~
33039 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33041 \begin_inset space ~
33050 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33059 arg "change-reject"
33067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33073 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33075 \begin_inset space ~
33078 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33080 \begin_inset space ~
33089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33098 arg "changes-merge"
33106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33112 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33114 \begin_inset space ~
33117 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33119 \begin_inset space ~
33128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33137 arg "all-changes-accept"
33145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33151 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33153 \begin_inset space ~
33156 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33158 \begin_inset space ~
33162 \begin_inset space ~
33171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33180 arg "all-changes-reject"
33188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33194 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33196 \begin_inset space ~
33199 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33201 \begin_inset space ~
33205 \begin_inset space ~
33214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33237 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33238 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33251 \begin_inset space ~
33260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33283 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33285 \begin_inset space ~
33301 \begin_layout Standard
33302 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33308 \begin_layout Standard
33309 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33329 \begin_layout Standard
33330 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33331 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33332 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33333 the next change after the current cursor position.
33334 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33335 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33336 step to the next change.
33337 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33340 \begin_layout Standard
33341 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33342 to describe a change.
33345 \begin_layout Standard
33346 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33351 \begin_inset Index idx
33354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33355 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33361 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33368 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33371 \begin_layout Section
33372 Comparison of Documents
33373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33375 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33380 \begin_inset Index idx
33383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33384 Comparison of documents
33392 \begin_layout Standard
33393 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33395 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33399 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33401 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33402 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33406 \begin_inset space ~
33410 \begin_inset space ~
33414 \begin_inset space ~
33423 \begin_inset space ~
33427 \begin_inset space ~
33431 \begin_inset space ~
33435 \begin_inset space ~
33439 \begin_inset space ~
33443 \begin_inset space ~
33448 enables the change tracking option
33451 \begin_inset space ~
33455 \begin_inset space ~
33459 \begin_inset space ~
33464 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33467 \begin_layout Section
33468 International Support
33469 \begin_inset Index idx
33472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33473 International support
33481 \begin_layout Standard
33482 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33483 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33484 up LyX to use them:
33485 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33487 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33494 \begin_layout Standard
33495 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33496 \begin_inset space ~
33500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33502 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33509 \begin_layout Subsection
33511 \begin_inset Index idx
33514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33521 \begin_inset Index idx
33524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33525 Document ! Settings
33531 \begin_inset Index idx
33534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33535 Document ! Language
33543 \begin_layout Standard
33546 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33547 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33550 dialog lets you set
33552 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33557 \begin_layout Standard
33562 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33566 \begin_inset space ~
33571 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33572 For details about the different encoding options see section
33573 \begin_inset space ~
33577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33579 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33586 \begin_layout Subsection
33587 Keyboard mapping configuration
33588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33590 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33597 \begin_layout Standard
33598 If you have for example a U.
33599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33602 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33603 can use an alternate keymap.
33604 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33605 use an Italian keymap.
33608 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33609 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33610 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33613 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33614 \begin_inset space ~
33618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33620 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33625 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33626 which one you want to use.
33629 \begin_layout Standard
33630 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33631 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33632 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33636 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33637 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33638 one to support the characters you want.
33639 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33646 \begin_layout Chapter
33649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33651 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33658 \begin_layout Standard
33659 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33660 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33661 topic inside the user's guide.
33664 \begin_layout Section
33666 \begin_inset Index idx
33669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33683 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33686 \begin_layout Subsection
33690 \begin_layout Standard
33691 Creates a new document.
33694 \begin_layout Subsection
33698 \begin_layout Standard
33699 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33700 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33701 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33704 \begin_layout Subsection
33708 \begin_layout Standard
33712 \begin_layout Subsection
33716 \begin_layout Standard
33717 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33718 Click there on a file to open it.
33721 \begin_layout Subsection
33725 \begin_layout Standard
33726 Closes the current document.
33729 \begin_layout Subsection
33733 \begin_layout Standard
33734 Closes all opened documents.
33737 \begin_layout Subsection
33741 \begin_layout Standard
33742 Saves the actual document.
33745 \begin_layout Subsection
33749 \begin_layout Standard
33750 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33753 \begin_layout Subsection
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33758 Saves all opened documents.
33761 \begin_layout Subsection
33765 \begin_layout Standard
33766 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33769 \begin_layout Subsection
33773 \begin_layout Standard
33774 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33775 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33776 It is described in the section
33778 Version Control in LyX
33782 Additional Features
33787 \begin_layout Subsection
33791 \begin_layout Standard
33792 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33793 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33795 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33798 \begin_layout Standard
33799 When using the menu entry
33802 \begin_inset space ~
33807 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33811 \begin_inset space ~
33815 \begin_inset space ~
33819 \begin_inset space ~
33824 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33825 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33828 \begin_layout Subsection
33830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33839 \begin_layout Standard
33840 You can export your document to various file formats.
33841 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
33842 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33843 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
33846 \begin_layout Standard
33847 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33849 \begin_inset space ~
33853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33855 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
33862 \begin_layout Description
33868 \begin_inset space ~
33875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33882 yX format of the special LyX
33883 \begin_inset space ~
33886 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33887 \begin_inset Newline newline
33890 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
33893 \begin_layout Description
33894 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33900 \begin_layout Description
33902 \begin_inset space ~
33905 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33911 \begin_layout Description
33912 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
33913 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33914 files paths or file names in your document.
33915 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33922 \begin_layout Description
33923 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33924 in files paths or file names
33927 \begin_layout Description
33929 \begin_inset space ~
33936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33943 eX) DVI-format using the program
33947 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
33950 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33958 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33966 \begin_layout Description
33968 \begin_inset space ~
33971 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33975 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33980 \begin_layout Description
33981 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
33985 \begin_layout Description
33987 \begin_inset space ~
33991 \begin_inset space ~
33994 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33998 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34006 \begin_layout Description
34013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34021 \begin_inset space ~
34032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34045 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34050 \begin_layout Description
34057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34065 \begin_inset space ~
34070 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34071 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34075 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34078 \begin_layout Description
34085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34093 \begin_inset space ~
34098 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34099 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34107 \begin_layout Description
34114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34122 \begin_inset space ~
34133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34146 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34151 \begin_layout Description
34153 \begin_inset space ~
34157 \begin_inset space ~
34166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34175 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34176 music notation software
34181 \begin_layout Description
34188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34198 \begin_inset space ~
34202 \begin_inset space ~
34205 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34206 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34207 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34210 \begin_layout Description
34217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34227 \begin_inset space ~
34230 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34246 represent the version number)
34249 \begin_layout Description
34256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34265 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34268 \begin_layout Description
34269 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34274 \begin_layout Description
34275 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34277 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34280 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34284 \begin_layout Description
34288 \begin_inset space ~
34293 PDF-format using the program
34297 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34300 \begin_layout Description
34304 \begin_inset space ~
34311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34320 PDF-format using the program
34324 , produces PDF-files directly
34327 \begin_layout Description
34331 \begin_inset space ~
34336 PDF-format using the program
34340 , produces PDF-files directly
34343 \begin_layout Description
34347 \begin_inset space ~
34352 PDF-format using the program
34356 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34359 \begin_layout Description
34363 \begin_inset space ~
34370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34379 PDF-format using the program
34383 , produces PDF-files directly
34386 \begin_layout Description
34390 \begin_inset space ~
34398 \begin_layout Description
34402 \begin_inset space ~
34406 \begin_inset space ~
34411 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34412 and then exported as text using the program
34417 \begin_layout Description
34422 PostScript format using the program
34427 \begin_layout Description
34428 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34429 programming language
34442 it is possible to use
34449 \begin_layout Standard
34450 If one of the menu entries
34457 \begin_inset space ~
34466 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34467 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34468 \begin_inset space ~
34472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34474 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34479 \begin_inset Index idx
34482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34483 Reconfiguration of LyX
34491 \begin_layout Subsection
34495 \begin_layout Standard
34496 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34497 format or send it to a printer.
34498 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34499 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34505 For more information have a look at section
34506 \begin_inset space ~
34510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34512 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34519 \begin_layout Subsection
34523 \begin_layout Standard
34524 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34525 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34526 prefix, see section
34527 \begin_inset space ~
34531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34533 reference "sec:Paths"
34538 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34547 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34548 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34549 \begin_inset space ~
34553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34555 reference "sub:Converters"
34562 \begin_layout Subsection
34563 New and Close Window
34566 \begin_layout Standard
34567 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34570 \begin_layout Subsection
34574 \begin_layout Standard
34575 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34578 \begin_layout Section
34580 \begin_inset Index idx
34583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34592 \begin_layout Subsection
34596 \begin_layout Standard
34597 Described in section
34598 \begin_inset space ~
34602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34604 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34611 \begin_layout Subsection
34612 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34615 \begin_layout Standard
34616 Described in section
34617 \begin_inset space ~
34621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34623 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34630 \begin_layout Subsection
34634 \begin_layout Standard
34635 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34636 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34639 \begin_layout Subsection
34643 \begin_layout Standard
34644 Selects the whole document.
34647 \begin_layout Subsection
34648 Find & Replace (Quick)
34651 \begin_layout Standard
34652 Described in section
34653 \begin_inset space ~
34657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34659 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34666 \begin_layout Subsection
34667 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34670 \begin_layout Standard
34671 Described in section
34672 \begin_inset space ~
34676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34678 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34685 \begin_layout Subsection
34686 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34689 \begin_layout Standard
34690 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34694 \begin_layout Subsection
34698 \begin_layout Standard
34699 Described in section
34700 \begin_inset space ~
34704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34706 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34713 \begin_layout Subsection
34715 \begin_inset Index idx
34718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34719 Paragraph ! Settings
34727 \begin_layout Standard
34728 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34729 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34733 \begin_layout Standard
34734 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34735 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34741 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34742 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34744 \begin_inset space ~
34752 \begin_layout Subsection
34756 \begin_layout Standard
34757 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34758 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34759 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34763 \begin_layout Standard
34764 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34766 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34767 The properties of tables are described in section
34768 \begin_inset space ~
34772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34774 reference "sec:Tables"
34778 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34779 \begin_inset space ~
34783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34785 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34792 \begin_layout Subsection
34793 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34796 \begin_layout Standard
34797 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34799 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34800 \begin_inset space ~
34804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34806 reference "sec:Nesting"
34811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34813 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34820 \begin_layout Section
34822 \begin_inset Index idx
34825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34835 At the bottom of the
34839 menu the opened documents are listed.
34842 \begin_layout Subsection
34843 Open/Close all Insets
34846 \begin_layout Standard
34847 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34850 \begin_layout Subsection
34851 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34854 \begin_layout Standard
34855 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34858 \begin_layout Standard
34859 Math macros are described in the
34866 \begin_layout Subsection
34870 \begin_layout Standard
34871 Shows the outline window as described in sections
34872 \begin_inset space ~
34876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34878 reference "sec:Navigating"
34883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34885 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
34892 \begin_layout Subsection
34896 \begin_layout Standard
34897 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34899 \begin_inset space ~
34903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34905 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34912 \begin_layout Subsection
34916 \begin_layout Standard
34917 Opens a window showing console messages.
34918 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
34919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34922 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34923 while LaTeX is processing the document.
34926 \begin_layout Subsection
34928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34930 name "sub:Toolbars"
34935 \begin_inset Index idx
34938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34947 \begin_layout Standard
34948 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34949 All toolbars and the
34952 \begin_inset space ~
34957 can be turned on and off.
34962 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34974 \begin_inset space ~
34986 \begin_inset space ~
34991 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
34995 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35002 \begin_layout Standard
35007 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35011 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35012 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35013 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35014 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35015 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35018 \begin_layout Standard
35019 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35020 \begin_inset space ~
35024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35026 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35033 \begin_layout Subsection
35037 \begin_layout Standard
35041 \begin_inset space ~
35045 \begin_inset space ~
35049 \begin_inset space ~
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35057 \begin_inset space ~
35061 \begin_inset space ~
35066 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35069 \begin_inset space ~
35073 \begin_inset space ~
35077 \begin_inset space ~
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35085 \begin_inset space ~
35089 \begin_inset space ~
35094 will split it horizontally.
35095 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35096 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35097 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35098 three or more documents at the same time.
35099 To close a split view, use the menu
35102 \begin_inset space ~
35106 \begin_inset space ~
35114 \begin_layout Subsection
35118 \begin_layout Standard
35119 Closes a split view.
35122 \begin_layout Subsection
35126 \begin_layout Standard
35127 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35128 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35129 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35130 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35131 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35134 \begin_layout Section
35136 \begin_inset Index idx
35139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35148 \begin_layout Subsection
35152 \begin_layout Standard
35153 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35154 \begin_inset space ~
35158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35160 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35171 \begin_layout Subsection
35173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35175 name "sub:Special-Character"
35182 \begin_layout Standard
35183 Here you can insert the following characters:
35186 \begin_layout Description
35191 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35193 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35194 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35195 You can get a complete display by checking
35198 \begin_inset space ~
35204 \begin_inset Newline newline
35208 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35216 Not all characters will be visible in the
35220 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35228 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35232 ) can display every character.
35240 \begin_layout Description
35241 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35245 \begin_layout Description
35247 \begin_inset space ~
35251 \begin_inset space ~
35254 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35255 \begin_inset space ~
35259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35261 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35268 \begin_layout Description
35270 \begin_inset space ~
35273 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35276 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35277 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35283 \begin_layout Description
35285 \begin_inset space ~
35288 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35291 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35292 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35298 \begin_layout Description
35300 \begin_inset space ~
35303 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35307 \begin_layout Description
35309 \begin_inset space ~
35312 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35316 \begin_layout Description
35318 \begin_inset space ~
35321 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35325 \begin_layout Description
35327 \begin_inset space ~
35331 \begin_inset Index idx
35334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35341 \begin_inset Index idx
35344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35345 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35350 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35351 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35353 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35358 \begin_inset Index idx
35361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35362 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35368 \begin_inset Newline newline
35371 More information about this feature can be found in the
35377 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35383 \begin_layout Subsection
35387 \begin_layout Standard
35388 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35391 \begin_layout Description
35392 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35393 \begin_inset script superscript
35395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35404 \begin_layout Description
35405 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35406 \begin_inset script subscript
35408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35417 \begin_layout Description
35419 \begin_inset space ~
35422 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35423 \begin_inset space ~
35427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35429 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35436 \begin_layout Description
35438 \begin_inset space ~
35441 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35442 \begin_inset space ~
35446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35448 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35455 \begin_layout Description
35457 \begin_inset space ~
35460 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35461 \begin_inset space ~
35465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35467 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35474 \begin_layout Description
35476 \begin_inset space ~
35479 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35485 \begin_inset space \space{}
35488 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35489 An example from the LyX
35494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35497 To insert a fraction use the command
35502 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35506 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35515 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35522 \begin_layout Description
35524 \begin_inset space ~
35527 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35528 \begin_inset space ~
35532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35534 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35541 \begin_layout Description
35543 \begin_inset space ~
35546 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35547 \begin_inset space ~
35551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35553 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35560 \begin_layout Description
35562 \begin_inset space ~
35565 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35566 \begin_inset space ~
35570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35572 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35579 \begin_layout Description
35580 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35587 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35594 \begin_layout Description
35596 \begin_inset space ~
35599 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35600 \begin_inset space ~
35604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35606 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35613 \begin_layout Description
35615 \begin_inset space ~
35618 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35619 \begin_inset space ~
35623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35625 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35632 \begin_layout Description
35634 \begin_inset space ~
35638 \begin_inset space ~
35641 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35642 \begin_inset space ~
35646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35648 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35655 \begin_layout Description
35657 \begin_inset space ~
35660 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35661 as described in section
35662 \begin_inset space ~
35666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35668 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35675 \begin_layout Description
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35680 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35681 \begin_inset space ~
35685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35687 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35694 \begin_layout Description
35696 \begin_inset space ~
35699 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35700 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35708 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35715 \begin_layout Description
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35720 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35721 \begin_inset space ~
35725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35727 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35734 \begin_layout Description
35736 \begin_inset space ~
35740 \begin_inset space ~
35743 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35744 \begin_inset space ~
35748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35750 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35757 \begin_layout Subsection
35761 \begin_layout Standard
35762 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35766 \begin_inset space ~
35783 are described in section
35784 \begin_inset space ~
35788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35790 reference "sec:toc"
35799 is described in section
35800 \begin_inset space ~
35804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35806 reference "sec:Index"
35814 is described in section
35815 \begin_inset space ~
35819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35821 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35827 BibTeX Bibliography
35829 is described in section
35830 \begin_inset space ~
35834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35836 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
35843 \begin_layout Subsection
35847 \begin_layout Standard
35848 To insert floats, as described in section
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35855 reference "sec:Floats"
35859 and in detail the chapter
35866 \begin_inset space ~
35874 \begin_layout Subsection
35878 \begin_layout Standard
35879 To insert notes, described in section
35880 \begin_inset space ~
35884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35886 reference "sec:Notes"
35893 \begin_layout Subsection
35897 \begin_layout Standard
35898 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
35900 Branches are described in section
35901 \begin_inset space ~
35905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35907 reference "sec:Branches"
35914 \begin_layout Subsection
35918 \begin_layout Standard
35919 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35920 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35922 An example is the document class
35923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35930 with three custom insets.
35933 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35937 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
35943 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35946 \begin_layout Subsection
35948 \begin_inset Index idx
35951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35960 \begin_layout Standard
35961 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35963 For more information see chapter
35965 External Document Parts
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35974 \begin_layout Subsection
35976 \begin_inset Index idx
35979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35988 \begin_layout Standard
35989 Inserts a box in a certain style.
35990 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
35997 \begin_inset space ~
36005 \begin_layout Subsection
36009 \begin_layout Standard
36014 dialog as described in section
36015 \begin_inset space ~
36019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36021 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36028 \begin_layout Subsection
36032 \begin_layout Standard
36037 as described in section
36038 \begin_inset space ~
36042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36044 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36051 \begin_layout Subsection
36055 \begin_layout Standard
36060 as described in section
36061 \begin_inset space ~
36065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36067 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36074 \begin_layout Subsection
36076 \begin_inset Index idx
36079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36086 \begin_inset Index idx
36089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36090 Longtables ! Caption
36098 \begin_layout Standard
36099 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36100 Floats are described in section
36101 \begin_inset space ~
36105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36107 reference "sec:Floats"
36111 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36118 \begin_inset space ~
36126 \begin_layout Subsection
36130 \begin_layout Standard
36131 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36138 reference "sec:Index"
36145 \begin_layout Subsection
36149 \begin_layout Standard
36150 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36151 \begin_inset space ~
36155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36157 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36164 \begin_layout Subsection
36168 \begin_layout Standard
36169 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36170 Tables are described in section
36171 \begin_inset space ~
36175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36177 reference "sec:Tables"
36181 and in detail in the chapter
36188 \begin_inset space ~
36196 \begin_layout Subsection
36200 \begin_layout Standard
36206 Graphics are described in section
36207 \begin_inset space ~
36211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36213 reference "sec:Graphics"
36220 \begin_layout Subsection
36224 \begin_layout Standard
36225 Inserts a URL as described in section
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36232 reference "sub:URLs"
36239 \begin_layout Subsection
36243 \begin_layout Standard
36244 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36245 \begin_inset space ~
36249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36251 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36258 \begin_layout Subsection
36262 \begin_layout Standard
36263 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36264 \begin_inset space ~
36268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36270 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36277 \begin_layout Subsection
36281 \begin_layout Standard
36282 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36283 \begin_inset space ~
36287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36289 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36296 \begin_layout Subsection
36300 \begin_layout Standard
36301 Is only visible if the cursor is in front in or behind a section heading,
36302 title or caption of a float.
36303 Inserts a short title as described in section
36304 \begin_inset space ~
36308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36310 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36317 \begin_layout Subsection
36321 \begin_layout Standard
36322 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36323 \begin_inset space ~
36327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36329 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36336 \begin_layout Subsection
36338 \begin_inset Index idx
36341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36350 \begin_layout Standard
36351 Inserts a program listings box.
36352 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36354 Program Code Listings
36359 \begin_inset space ~
36367 \begin_layout Subsection
36371 \begin_layout Standard
36372 Inserts the actual date.
36373 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36375 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36383 \begin_inset space ~
36391 \begin_layout Subsection
36395 \begin_layout Standard
36396 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36397 \begin_inset space ~
36401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36403 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36410 \begin_layout Section
36412 \begin_inset Index idx
36415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36424 \begin_layout Standard
36425 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36429 of the current document.
36430 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36433 \begin_layout Subsection
36437 \begin_layout Standard
36438 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36439 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36440 to jump, for example, between section
36441 \begin_inset space ~
36445 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36446 \begin_inset space ~
36449 2.5 and use the submenu
36452 \begin_inset space ~
36456 \begin_inset space ~
36463 \begin_inset space ~
36469 \begin_inset space ~
36473 \begin_inset space ~
36479 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36483 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36489 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36492 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36495 \begin_layout Standard
36496 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36500 \begin_inset space ~
36505 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36513 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36516 \begin_layout Subsection
36517 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36520 \begin_layout Standard
36521 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36525 \begin_layout Subsection
36529 \begin_layout Standard
36530 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36531 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36532 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36536 \begin_inset space ~
36540 \begin_inset space ~
36548 \begin_layout Subsection
36552 \begin_layout Standard
36553 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36556 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36558 \begin_inset space ~
36566 \begin_inset space ~
36571 manual for a detailed description.
36574 \begin_layout Section
36576 \begin_inset Index idx
36579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36588 \begin_layout Subsection
36592 \begin_layout Standard
36593 Change Tracking is described in section
36594 \begin_inset space ~
36598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36600 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36607 \begin_layout Subsection
36612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36622 \begin_layout Standard
36623 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36625 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36626 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36627 to the clipboard or update the view.
36628 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36631 \begin_layout Subsection
36632 Start Appendix Here
36635 \begin_layout Standard
36636 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36637 as described in section
36638 \begin_inset space ~
36642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36644 reference "sec:Appendices"
36651 \begin_layout Subsection
36653 \begin_inset space ~
36659 \begin_layout Standard
36660 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36661 default output format for the document (menu
36663 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36664 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36665 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36667 \begin_inset space ~
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36683 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36687 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
36689 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36690 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36692 \begin_inset space ~
36695 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36697 \begin_inset space ~
36700 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36702 \begin_inset space ~
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36712 \begin_inset space ~
36716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36718 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36722 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36723 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36725 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36726 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36728 \begin_inset space ~
36731 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36733 \begin_inset space ~
36736 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36740 \begin_inset space ~
36744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36746 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36751 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36752 The default output format is
36755 \begin_inset space ~
36763 \begin_layout Subsection
36764 View (Other Formats)
36767 \begin_layout Standard
36768 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36769 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36770 actual document with an external program.
36771 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36772 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
36773 All possible formats are listed in section
36774 \begin_inset space ~
36778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36780 reference "sub:Export"
36785 You should at least see the menu entry
36790 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
36791 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
36792 \begin_inset space ~
36796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36798 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36803 \begin_inset Index idx
36806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36807 Reconfiguration of LyX
36815 \begin_layout Standard
36816 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
36817 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36819 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36820 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36822 \begin_inset space ~
36825 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36827 \begin_inset space ~
36830 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36834 \begin_inset space ~
36838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36840 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36845 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36848 \begin_layout Subsection
36850 \begin_inset space ~
36856 \begin_layout Standard
36857 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
36858 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
36861 \begin_layout Subsection
36862 Update (Other Formats)
36865 \begin_layout Standard
36866 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
36867 your document without opening a new viewer window.
36870 \begin_layout Subsection
36871 View Master Document
36874 \begin_layout Standard
36875 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36891 \begin_inset space ~
36896 manual for more information on this topic).
36897 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
36898 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
36902 \begin_inset space ~
36906 \begin_inset space ~
36911 generates the output of the whole book, while
36915 will just output the chapter alone.
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36919 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36920 in the document settings (menu
36922 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36923 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36924 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36926 \begin_inset space ~
36930 \begin_inset space ~
36936 \begin_inset space ~
36940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36942 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36946 ) or in the preferences (menu
36948 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36949 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36951 \begin_inset space ~
36954 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36956 \begin_inset space ~
36959 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36961 \begin_inset space ~
36965 \begin_inset space ~
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36977 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36984 \begin_layout Subsection
36985 Update Master Document
36988 \begin_layout Standard
36989 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37005 \begin_inset space ~
37010 manual for more information on this topic).
37011 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37012 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37015 \begin_layout Standard
37016 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37017 in the document settings (menu
37019 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37020 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37021 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37023 \begin_inset space ~
37027 \begin_inset space ~
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37039 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37043 ) or in the preferences (menu
37045 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37046 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37048 \begin_inset space ~
37051 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37056 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37058 \begin_inset space ~
37062 \begin_inset space ~
37068 \begin_inset space ~
37072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37074 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37081 \begin_layout Subsection
37085 \begin_layout Standard
37086 Un/compresses the current document.
37089 \begin_layout Subsection
37093 \begin_layout Standard
37094 The document settings are described in appendix
37095 \begin_inset space ~
37099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37101 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37108 \begin_layout Section
37110 \begin_inset Index idx
37113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37122 \begin_layout Subsection
37126 \begin_layout Standard
37127 Spell checking is explained in section
37128 \begin_inset space ~
37132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37134 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37141 \begin_layout Subsection
37145 \begin_layout Standard
37146 The thesaurus is described in section
37147 \begin_inset space ~
37151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37153 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37160 \begin_layout Subsection
37162 \begin_inset Index idx
37165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37172 \begin_inset Index idx
37175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37184 \begin_layout Standard
37185 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37186 the highlighted document part.
37189 \begin_layout Subsection
37194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37202 \begin_inset Index idx
37205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37214 \begin_layout Standard
37215 Generates with the help of the program
37219 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37220 This feature is not available on Windows.
37223 \begin_layout Subsection
37228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37236 \begin_inset Index idx
37239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37248 \begin_layout Standard
37249 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37254 \begin_inset space ~
37259 to see the full filename paths.
37262 \begin_layout Subsection
37264 \begin_inset Index idx
37267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37276 \begin_layout Standard
37277 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37278 \begin_inset space ~
37282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37284 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37291 \begin_layout Subsection
37293 \begin_inset Index idx
37296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37297 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37308 Reconfiguration of LyX
37312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37325 \begin_inset Index idx
37328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37329 Reconfiguration of LyX
37337 \begin_layout Standard
37338 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37339 needs; see also section
37340 \begin_inset space ~
37344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37346 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37353 \begin_layout Subsection
37357 \begin_layout Standard
37362 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37369 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37376 \begin_layout Section
37378 \begin_inset Index idx
37381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37390 \begin_layout Standard
37391 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37393 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37397 \begin_layout Standard
37401 \begin_inset space ~
37406 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37407 found by LyX (see also section
37408 \begin_inset space ~
37412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37414 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37421 \begin_layout Standard
37425 \begin_inset space ~
37432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37441 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37445 \begin_layout Section
37447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37449 name "sec:Toolbars"
37456 \begin_layout Standard
37457 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37464 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37471 \begin_layout Standard
37472 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37473 This is described in the
37475 Additional Features
37480 \begin_layout Subsection
37482 \begin_inset Index idx
37485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37494 \begin_layout Standard
37495 \begin_inset Graphics
37496 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37504 \begin_layout Standard
37505 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37511 \begin_layout Standard
37512 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37529 \begin_inset Note Note
37532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37533 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37538 manual for more information.
37546 \begin_layout Standard
37547 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37553 \begin_layout Standard
37554 \begin_inset Tabular
37555 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37556 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37564 \begin_inset Graphics
37565 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37579 pull-down box for the environments
37592 \begin_layout Standard
37593 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37599 \begin_layout Standard
37601 \begin_inset Tabular
37602 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37603 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37604 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37605 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37629 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37659 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37689 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37705 arg "dialog-show print"
37713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37719 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37735 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37749 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37756 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37779 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37786 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37809 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37839 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37846 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37869 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37899 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37915 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37929 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37955 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37969 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37997 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38011 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38012 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38040 Emphasize text, function of the
38042 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38044 \begin_inset space ~
38047 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38077 Set text to noun style, function of the
38079 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38081 \begin_inset space ~
38084 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38102 arg "textstyle-apply"
38110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38114 Format text using the current settings in the
38116 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38118 \begin_inset space ~
38121 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38130 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38153 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38154 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38156 \begin_inset space ~
38165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38174 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38188 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38202 arg "tabular-insert"
38210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38216 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38223 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38232 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38244 Toggle outline window on/off,
38246 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38262 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38274 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38280 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38289 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38301 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38314 \begin_layout Subsection
38316 \begin_inset Index idx
38319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38328 \begin_layout Standard
38329 \begin_inset Graphics
38330 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38338 \begin_layout Standard
38339 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38345 \begin_layout Standard
38346 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38350 \begin_layout Standard
38351 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38357 \begin_layout Standard
38358 \begin_inset Tabular
38359 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38360 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38361 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38362 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38399 arg "layout Enumerate"
38407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38426 arg "layout Itemize"
38434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38480 arg "layout Description"
38488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38507 arg "depth-increment"
38515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38521 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38523 \begin_inset space ~
38527 \begin_inset space ~
38536 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38545 arg "depth-decrement"
38553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38559 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38561 \begin_inset space ~
38565 \begin_inset space ~
38574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38583 arg "float-insert figure"
38591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38597 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38598 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38614 arg "float-insert table"
38622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38628 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38629 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38659 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38675 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38689 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38705 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38719 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38749 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38751 \begin_inset space ~
38760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 arg "nomencl-insert"
38777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38783 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38785 \begin_inset space ~
38794 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38803 arg "footnote-insert"
38811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38817 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38824 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38833 arg "marginalnote-insert"
38841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38847 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38849 \begin_inset space ~
38858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38881 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38882 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38895 \begin_inset space ~
38904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38913 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38927 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38957 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39004 \begin_inset space ~
39013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39022 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39036 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39037 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39053 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39067 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39068 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39070 \begin_inset space ~
39079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39088 arg "dialog-show character"
39096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39102 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39104 \begin_inset space ~
39107 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39123 arg "layout-paragraph"
39131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39137 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39139 \begin_inset space ~
39148 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39157 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39171 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39185 \begin_layout Subsection
39186 View/Update Toolbar
39187 \begin_inset Index idx
39190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39191 Toolbar ! View / Update
39199 \begin_layout Standard
39200 \begin_inset Graphics
39201 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39208 \begin_layout Standard
39209 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39215 \begin_layout Standard
39216 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39220 \begin_layout Standard
39221 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39227 \begin_layout Standard
39228 \begin_inset Tabular
39229 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39230 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39231 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39232 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39256 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39263 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39272 arg "buffer-update"
39280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39286 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39293 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39302 arg "master-buffer-view"
39310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39316 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39318 \begin_inset space ~
39327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39336 arg "master-buffer-update"
39344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39350 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39352 \begin_inset space ~
39356 \begin_inset space ~
39365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39374 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39388 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39389 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39390 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39391 Synchronize with Output
39397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39402 \begin_inset Graphics
39403 filename ../images/view-others.png
39405 groupId toolbarbuttons
39416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39422 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39423 View (Other Formats)
39429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39434 \begin_inset Graphics
39435 filename ../images/update-others.png
39437 groupId toolbarbuttons
39446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39452 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39453 Update (Other Formats)
39466 \begin_layout Standard
39467 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39471 \begin_layout Subsection
39475 \begin_layout Standard
39476 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39477 \begin_inset space ~
39481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39483 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39487 , the table toolbar
39488 \begin_inset Index idx
39491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39500 \begin_inset space ~
39505 manual and the math macro toolbar
39506 \begin_inset Index idx
39509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39522 \begin_layout Chapter
39523 The Document Settings
39524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39526 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39531 \begin_inset Index idx
39534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39535 Document ! Settings
39543 \begin_layout Standard
39547 \begin_inset space ~
39552 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39553 is called with the menu
39555 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39559 You can save your document settings as default with the
39561 Save as Document Defaults
39563 button in any dialog.
39564 This will create a template named
39568 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39572 \begin_layout Standard
39577 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39578 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39581 \begin_layout Standard
39582 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39585 \begin_layout Standard
39586 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39587 to find the one you are looking for.
39588 To find a setting quicker, you can sue the search field which is above
39589 the submenus of the dialog.
39591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39595 \begin_inset space \space{}
39599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39606 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39607 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39608 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39611 \begin_layout Section
39615 \begin_layout Standard
39616 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39618 Document classes are described in section
39619 \begin_inset space ~
39623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39625 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39633 \begin_layout Standard
39637 \begin_inset space ~
39642 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39646 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39647 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39649 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39658 \begin_layout Standard
39659 Some classes use special class options by default.
39660 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39664 and you can decide to use them or not.
39665 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39666 recommended you leave them untouched.
39671 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39676 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39677 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39683 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39684 \begin_inset Newline newline
39689 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39692 \begin_inset Newline newline
39695 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
39701 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39703 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39715 \begin_layout Standard
39720 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39721 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
39722 document is opened without its master.
39723 This way child documents are always compilable.
39724 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39731 \begin_inset space ~
39739 \begin_layout Standard
39740 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
39750 \begin_inset Index idx
39753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39754 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
39760 \begin_inset Index idx
39763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39764 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
39769 for cross-references, see section
39770 \begin_inset space ~
39774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39783 \begin_layout Section
39787 \begin_layout Standard
39788 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39789 Please refer to the section
39792 \begin_inset space ~
39800 \begin_inset space ~
39805 manual for details.
39808 \begin_layout Section
39812 \begin_layout Standard
39813 Modules are explained in section
39814 \begin_inset space ~
39818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39820 reference "sub:Modules"
39827 \begin_layout Section
39831 \begin_layout Standard
39833 \begin_inset space ~
39837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39839 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
39846 \begin_layout Section
39850 \begin_layout Standard
39851 The document font settings are described in section
39852 \begin_inset space ~
39856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39858 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
39865 \begin_layout Section
39869 \begin_layout Standard
39870 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
39882 \begin_inset space ~
39887 and whether it should be a
39890 \begin_inset space ~
39895 can also be specified here.
39898 \begin_layout Standard
39899 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
39901 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
39903 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
39906 \begin_layout Section
39910 \begin_layout Standard
39911 This dialog is described in sections
39912 \begin_inset space ~
39916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39918 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
39923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39925 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
39932 \begin_layout Section
39936 \begin_layout Standard
39937 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39944 reference "sub:Margins"
39951 \begin_layout Section
39953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39955 name "sec:Language-encodings"
39960 \begin_inset Index idx
39963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39964 Language ! Encoding
39972 \begin_layout Standard
39973 The document language and quote styles are set here.
39974 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
39975 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
39976 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39977 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
39978 known for a particular character).
39982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39983 The known commands are defined in a text file (
39988 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
39993 manual for details.
40001 \begin_layout Standard
40002 If you use the option
40006 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40007 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40008 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40009 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40010 exactly one encoding.
40011 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40014 \begin_layout Standard
40015 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40016 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40017 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40018 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40019 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40020 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40025 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40026 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40027 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40028 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40029 engines to standard LaTeX.
40030 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40031 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40034 \begin_inset space ~
40041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40053 \begin_inset space ~
40060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40072 \begin_inset space ~
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40084 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40089 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40093 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40096 \begin_layout Standard
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40105 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40115 The possible settings are:
40118 \begin_layout Description
40119 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40121 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40122 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40132 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40139 \begin_layout Description
40140 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40141 format you will use.
40142 In many cases this will be
40147 \begin_inset Index idx
40150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40151 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40157 If the newer package
40162 \begin_inset Index idx
40165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40166 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40171 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40172 this package will be used instead of
40179 \begin_layout Description
40181 \begin_inset space ~
40192 would be more appropriate.
40195 \begin_layout Description
40196 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40197 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40201 (for German texts), type in
40204 \begin_inset Newline newline
40209 usepackage{ngerman}
40212 \begin_layout Description
40213 None will not use a language package.
40214 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40217 \begin_layout Standard
40218 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40221 \begin_layout Description
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40231 \begin_inset space ~
40238 , but the LaTeX-package
40243 \begin_inset Index idx
40246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40247 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40253 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40254 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40255 languages in TeX code.
40258 \begin_layout Description
40259 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40260 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40261 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40264 \begin_layout Description
40266 \begin_inset space ~
40270 \begin_inset space ~
40273 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40276 \begin_layout Description
40278 \begin_inset space ~
40282 \begin_inset space ~
40285 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40288 \begin_layout Description
40290 \begin_inset space ~
40293 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40296 \begin_layout Description
40298 \begin_inset space ~
40302 \begin_inset space ~
40305 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40306 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40309 \begin_layout Description
40311 \begin_inset space ~
40315 \begin_inset space ~
40318 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40322 \begin_layout Description
40324 \begin_inset space ~
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40331 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40332 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40335 \begin_layout Description
40337 \begin_inset space ~
40341 \begin_inset space ~
40345 \begin_inset space ~
40348 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40355 \begin_layout Description
40357 \begin_inset space ~
40361 \begin_inset space ~
40365 \begin_inset space ~
40368 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40369 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40372 \begin_layout Description
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40378 \begin_inset space ~
40381 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40382 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40383 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40384 \begin_inset space ~
40388 \begin_inset space ~
40394 \begin_layout Description
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40400 \begin_inset space ~
40403 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40404 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40405 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40406 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40407 \begin_inset space ~
40411 \begin_inset space ~
40417 \begin_layout Description
40419 \begin_inset space ~
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40426 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40429 \begin_layout Description
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40438 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40441 \begin_layout Description
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40447 \begin_inset space ~
40450 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40453 \begin_layout Description
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40458 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40461 \begin_layout Description
40463 \begin_inset space ~
40466 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40469 \begin_layout Description
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40475 \begin_inset space ~
40478 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40481 \begin_layout Description
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40493 \begin_layout Description
40495 \begin_inset space ~
40499 \begin_inset space ~
40502 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40505 \begin_layout Description
40507 \begin_inset space ~
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40517 \begin_layout Description
40519 \begin_inset space ~
40523 \begin_inset space ~
40526 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40531 \begin_inset Index idx
40534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40535 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40540 , when using this, set the document language to
40545 \begin_layout Description
40547 \begin_inset space ~
40551 \begin_inset space ~
40554 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40558 , when using this, set the document language to
40561 \begin_inset space ~
40567 \begin_layout Description
40569 \begin_inset space ~
40573 \begin_inset space ~
40576 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40581 \begin_inset Index idx
40584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40585 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40590 , when using this, set the document language to
40595 \begin_layout Description
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40601 \begin_inset space ~
40604 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40608 , when using this, set the document language to
40613 \begin_layout Description
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40622 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40626 , when using this, set the document language to
40631 \begin_layout Description
40633 \begin_inset space ~
40636 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40639 \begin_layout Description
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40645 \begin_inset space ~
40649 \begin_inset space ~
40652 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40655 \begin_layout Description
40657 \begin_inset space ~
40661 \begin_inset space ~
40665 \begin_inset space ~
40668 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40669 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40670 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40673 \begin_layout Description
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40685 \begin_layout Description
40687 \begin_inset space ~
40691 \begin_inset space ~
40694 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40695 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40698 \begin_layout Description
40700 \begin_inset space ~
40704 \begin_inset space ~
40707 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
40712 \begin_inset Index idx
40715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40716 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40721 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40724 \begin_layout Description
40726 \begin_inset space ~
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40733 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40741 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
40746 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
40748 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40751 \begin_layout Description
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40760 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40765 \begin_inset Index idx
40768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40769 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
40774 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40777 \begin_layout Description
40779 \begin_inset space ~
40782 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40787 \begin_inset Index idx
40790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40791 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40797 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40801 \begin_layout Description
40803 \begin_inset space ~
40807 \begin_inset space ~
40811 \begin_inset space ~
40814 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40815 \begin_inset space ~
40821 \begin_layout Description
40823 \begin_inset space ~
40827 \begin_inset space ~
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40834 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
40835 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
40836 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
40840 \begin_layout Description
40842 \begin_inset space ~
40846 \begin_inset space ~
40850 \begin_inset space ~
40853 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
40854 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
40857 \begin_layout Section
40859 \begin_inset Index idx
40862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40869 \begin_inset Index idx
40872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40879 \begin_inset Index idx
40882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40883 Color ! Shaded boxes
40889 \begin_inset Index idx
40892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40893 Color ! Greyed-out notes
40901 \begin_layout Standard
40902 Here you can alter the font color for the
40906 (default: black), for
40909 \begin_inset space ~
40914 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
40918 (default: white) and for
40921 \begin_inset space ~
40931 sets the color back to the default.
40934 \begin_layout Standard
40935 Clicking any button showing
40943 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
40944 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
40945 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
40946 later more quickly.
40949 \begin_layout Standard
40950 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40954 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40959 out note appears blue in the output.)
40967 \begin_layout Standard
40968 Note, if you change the
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40976 font color and use the option
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40984 in the document settings under
40987 \begin_inset space ~
40992 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
40993 \begin_inset space ~
40997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40999 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41006 \begin_layout Standard
41007 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41013 \begin_layout Standard
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41026 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41031 Code after a forced page break:
41034 \begin_layout Itemize
41035 For the page color:
41036 \begin_inset Newline newline
41043 pagecolor{color name}
41046 \begin_layout Itemize
41047 For the text color:
41048 \begin_inset Newline newline
41058 \begin_layout Standard
41059 You are restricted to one of
41095 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41102 \begin_inset space ~
41108 \begin_inset Newline newline
41111 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41112 names to refer to them:
41115 \begin_layout Itemize
41121 \begin_inset Newline newline
41126 page_backgroundcolor
41129 \begin_layout Itemize
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41139 \begin_inset Newline newline
41147 \begin_layout Itemize
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41157 \begin_inset Newline newline
41165 \begin_layout Itemize
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41175 \begin_inset Newline newline
41183 \begin_layout Standard
41184 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41188 Cells of the Embedded
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41195 \begin_layout Section
41199 \begin_layout Standard
41200 Here you can adjust the
41204 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41208 as described in section
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41215 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41222 \begin_layout Section
41226 \begin_layout Standard
41227 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41232 \begin_inset Index idx
41235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41236 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41246 \begin_inset Index idx
41249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41250 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41258 Sectioned bibliography
41260 using the LaTeX package
41265 \begin_inset Index idx
41268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41269 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41274 and you can select a
41278 for the generation of the bibliography.
41279 For a further description see section
41280 \begin_inset space ~
41284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41286 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41293 \begin_layout Section
41297 \begin_layout Standard
41298 Here you can define the
41302 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41304 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41310 reference "sec:Index"
41317 \begin_layout Section
41321 \begin_layout Standard
41322 The PDF properties are explained in section
41323 \begin_inset space ~
41327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41329 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41336 \begin_layout Section
41340 \begin_layout Standard
41341 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41346 \begin_inset Index idx
41349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41350 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41360 \begin_inset Index idx
41363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41364 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41374 \begin_inset Index idx
41377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41378 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41388 \begin_inset Index idx
41391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41392 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41397 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41400 \begin_layout Description
41401 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41402 ensure that you have enabled
41405 \begin_inset space ~
41413 \begin_layout Description
41414 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41429 \begin_layout Description
41430 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41441 \begin_layout Description
41442 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41444 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41453 \begin_layout Section
41457 \begin_layout Standard
41458 The float placement options are described in the section
41461 \begin_inset space ~
41469 \begin_inset space ~
41477 \begin_layout Section
41481 \begin_layout Standard
41482 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41484 Program Code Listings
41489 \begin_inset space ~
41497 \begin_layout Section
41501 \begin_layout Standard
41502 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41510 set to be used and set the
41515 The itemize environment is described in section
41516 \begin_inset space ~
41520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41522 reference "sec:Itemize"
41529 \begin_layout Standard
41530 You can furthermore specify a
41533 \begin_inset space ~
41538 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41539 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41546 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41552 \begin_inset space \space{}
41556 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41566 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41567 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41570 \begin_layout Standard
41571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41579 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41582 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41583 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41585 \begin_inset space ~
41591 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41595 usepackage{textcomp}
41598 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41602 usepackage{amssymb}
41612 \begin_layout Section
41616 \begin_layout Standard
41617 Branches are described in section
41618 \begin_inset space ~
41622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41624 reference "sec:Branches"
41631 \begin_layout Section
41633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41635 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41642 \begin_layout Standard
41643 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41646 \begin_layout Description
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41652 \begin_inset space ~
41655 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41675 View Master Document
41676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41683 Update Master Document
41684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41691 menu or the toolbar.
41692 The default is set in
41694 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41695 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41697 \begin_inset space ~
41700 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41704 \begin_inset space ~
41708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41710 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41717 \begin_layout Description
41719 \begin_inset space ~
41723 \begin_inset space ~
41726 Output settings for the menu
41728 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41730 \begin_inset space ~
41736 For a detailed description see section
41738 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41743 \begin_inset space ~
41751 \begin_layout Description
41753 \begin_inset space ~
41757 \begin_inset space ~
41760 Options offers settings for the export format
41766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41779 \begin_inset space ~
41784 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41785 \begin_inset space ~
41788 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41792 \begin_inset space ~
41797 settings are described in detail in section
41799 Math Output in XHTML
41804 \begin_inset space ~
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41822 is used for the size of equations in the output.
41825 \begin_layout Section
41830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41840 \begin_layout Standard
41841 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
41842 or to define LaTeX-commands.
41843 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
41844 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
41848 \begin_layout Standard
41849 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
41850 \begin_inset space ~
41854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41856 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
41863 \begin_layout Section
41868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41878 \begin_layout Standard
41879 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
41880 or to define LaTeX-commands.
41881 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
41882 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
41886 \begin_layout Standard
41887 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41894 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
41901 \begin_layout Chapter
41907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41909 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41914 \begin_inset Index idx
41917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41926 \begin_layout Standard
41927 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
41929 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41933 It has the following submenus.
41936 \begin_layout Section
41940 \begin_layout Subsection
41944 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41945 User Interface File
41946 \begin_inset Index idx
41949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41950 Customization ! of toolbars
41956 \begin_inset Index idx
41959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41960 Customization ! of menus
41968 \begin_layout Standard
41969 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
41970 interface (ui) file.
41971 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
41979 \begin_layout Description
41984 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
41987 \begin_layout Description
41994 the menu entries in popup context menus
41997 \begin_layout Description
42002 specifies the toolbar buttons
42005 \begin_layout Standard
42006 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42007 and edit the entries.
42010 \begin_layout Standard
42011 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42023 entries must be finished with an explicit
42048 and in the case of the
42049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42061 The syntax for the entries is:
42064 \begin_layout Standard
42065 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42093 \begin_layout Standard
42095 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42098 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42100 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42113 \begin_inset space ~
42121 \begin_layout Standard
42122 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42128 \begin_layout Standard
42129 For example, assuming you use the menu
42131 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42134 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42138 \begin_layout Standard
42139 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42163 \begin_layout Standard
42165 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42180 to have the sixth bookmark.
42183 \begin_layout Standard
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42192 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42193 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42197 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42204 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42208 \begin_layout Standard
42211 Enable tool tips in main work area
42213 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42217 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42221 \begin_layout Standard
42224 Restore window layouts and geometries
42226 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42227 in the last LyX session.
42230 \begin_layout Standard
42233 Restore cursor positions
42235 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42239 \begin_layout Standard
42242 Load opened files from last session
42244 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42247 \begin_layout Standard
42250 Clear all session information
42252 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42253 of last opened documents, etc.).
42256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42260 name "sub:Backup documents"
42265 \begin_inset Index idx
42268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42277 \begin_layout Standard
42280 Backup original documents when saving
42282 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42283 it was saved the last time.
42284 It is stored in the
42287 \begin_inset space ~
42293 \begin_inset space ~
42297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42299 reference "sec:Paths"
42303 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42306 \begin_inset space ~
42312 The backup file has the file extension
42313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42327 \begin_layout Standard
42330 Backup documents, every
42332 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42335 \begin_layout Standard
42338 Save documents compressed by default
42340 always saves files in a compressed format.
42343 \begin_layout Standard
42348 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42351 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42353 \begin_inset space ~
42361 \begin_layout Standard
42364 Open documents in tabs
42366 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42369 \begin_layout Standard
42374 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42386 reference "sec:Paths"
42390 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42396 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42398 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42401 \begin_layout Standard
42404 Single close-tab button
42406 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42409 \begin_inset Graphics
42410 filename ../images/closetab.png
42417 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42418 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42421 \begin_layout Standard
42422 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42430 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42438 \begin_layout Subsection
42440 \begin_inset Index idx
42443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42452 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42459 \begin_layout Standard
42460 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42463 \begin_layout Standard
42464 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42472 This section only deals with the fonts
42477 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42480 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42481 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42492 \begin_layout Standard
42493 By default, LyX uses
42509 (depends on the system) as its
42512 \begin_inset space ~
42528 \begin_layout Standard
42529 You can change the font size with the
42536 \begin_layout Standard
42541 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42546 points have the size of 1
42547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42551 \begin_inset space ~
42555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42557 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42562 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42567 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42568 \begin_inset space ~
42572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42574 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42581 \begin_layout Standard
42584 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42586 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42587 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42588 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42589 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42591 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42592 \begin_inset space ~
42598 \begin_layout Subsection
42600 \begin_inset Index idx
42603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42610 \begin_inset Index idx
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42622 \begin_layout Standard
42623 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42624 the list and selecting the
42631 \begin_layout Standard
42632 By checking the option
42636 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42639 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42649 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42652 \begin_layout Subsection
42654 \begin_inset Index idx
42657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42666 \begin_layout Standard
42667 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42670 \begin_layout Standard
42675 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42676 This feature is described in section
42677 \begin_inset space ~
42681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42683 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42690 \begin_layout Standard
42691 Checking the option
42694 \begin_inset space ~
42698 \begin_inset space ~
42702 \begin_inset space ~
42707 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42710 \begin_layout Section
42712 \begin_inset Index idx
42715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42724 \begin_layout Subsection
42728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42735 Cursor follows scrollbar
42737 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42741 \begin_layout Standard
42742 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42743 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42744 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42747 \begin_layout Standard
42750 Scroll below end of document
42752 is self-explanatory.
42755 \begin_layout Standard
42756 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
42763 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42765 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42766 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42769 \begin_layout Standard
42772 Sort environments alphabetically
42774 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42777 \begin_layout Standard
42780 Group environments by their category
42782 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42785 \begin_layout Standard
42790 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42805 \begin_layout Standard
42806 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42811 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42812 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42816 \begin_layout Subsection
42818 \begin_inset Index idx
42821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42828 \begin_inset Index idx
42831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42832 Settings ! Shortcuts
42840 \begin_layout Standard
42845 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
42846 Several binding files are available, among them:
42849 \begin_layout Description
42850 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
42853 \begin_layout Description
42854 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
42866 \begin_layout Description
42867 mac.bind a set of bindings for
42870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42878 \begin_layout Standard
42879 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
42884 , and binding files for special languages.
42885 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
42886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42890 \begin_inset space \space{}
42894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42902 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
42906 \begin_layout Standard
42907 Some binding files, like
42911 , only have a limited scope.
42912 When looking at the end of the file
42916 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
42919 \begin_layout Standard
42923 \begin_inset space ~
42927 \begin_inset space ~
42932 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
42933 in the selected key binding file.
42936 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42940 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
42945 \begin_inset Index idx
42948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42949 Key Bindings ! Editing
42957 \begin_layout Standard
42958 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
42959 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
42960 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
42963 Show key-bindings containing
42966 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
42967 Insert there for example as keyword
42968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42975 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
42976 functions that contain
42977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42985 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
42986 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
42990 that you will find in the
42997 \begin_layout Standard
42998 For example, to add the shortcut
43006 , select the function and press the
43011 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43012 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43015 \begin_layout Standard
43016 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43017 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43018 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43019 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43020 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43025 \begin_layout Standard
43026 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43029 \begin_layout Standard
43030 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43032 The syntax of the entries is:
43035 \begin_layout Standard
43041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43059 \begin_layout Subsection
43061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43063 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43068 \begin_inset Index idx
43071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43078 \begin_inset Index idx
43081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43082 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43090 \begin_layout Standard
43091 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43092 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43093 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43094 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43097 \begin_inset space ~
43101 \begin_inset space ~
43106 and select the keyboard map file named
43113 \begin_layout Standard
43122 keyboard map and, if you use the
43126 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43129 arg "keymap-primary"
43135 arg "keymap-secondary"
43138 respectively or toggle between them with
43141 arg "keymap-toggle"
43147 \begin_layout Standard
43148 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43156 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43165 \begin_layout Standard
43166 You can also specify the mouse
43168 Wheel scrolling speed
43171 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43175 \begin_layout Standard
43183 \begin_inset space ~
43187 \begin_inset space ~
43192 you can select a key for zooming.
43193 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43196 \begin_layout Subsection
43200 \begin_layout Standard
43201 Input completion is described in section
43202 \begin_inset space ~
43206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43208 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43215 \begin_layout Section
43217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43224 \begin_inset Index idx
43227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43234 \begin_inset Index idx
43237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43246 \begin_layout Standard
43247 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43249 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43252 \begin_layout Description
43254 \begin_inset space ~
43257 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43258 It is the default when you
43269 \begin_inset space ~
43277 \begin_layout Description
43279 \begin_inset space ~
43282 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43284 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43286 \begin_inset space ~
43290 \begin_inset space ~
43298 \begin_layout Description
43300 \begin_inset space ~
43303 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43309 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43313 \begin_inset Newline newline
43317 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43329 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43337 \begin_layout Description
43339 \begin_inset space ~
43343 \begin_inset Index idx
43346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43352 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43353 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43354 \begin_inset space ~
43358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43360 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43368 will be used to save the backups.
43369 \begin_inset Newline newline
43372 Backup files have the ending
43373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43383 \begin_layout Description
43388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43396 \begin_inset space ~
43399 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43400 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43401 \begin_inset Newline newline
43408 You add a BibTeX-database
43413 You can edit this file with the program
43422 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43425 \begin_inset space ~
43431 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43436 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43437 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43443 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43444 \begin_inset Newline newline
43447 The pipe is also used for the
43452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43458 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43463 \begin_inset Newline newline
43466 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43467 \begin_inset Newline newline
43483 \begin_layout Description
43485 \begin_inset space ~
43488 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43491 \begin_layout Description
43493 \begin_inset space ~
43496 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43497 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43498 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43501 \begin_layout Description
43503 \begin_inset space ~
43506 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43512 You only need to specify it if you are using
43516 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43522 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43526 \begin_layout Description
43528 \begin_inset space ~
43531 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43532 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43533 where to find it on the system.
43534 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43535 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43544 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43545 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43548 \begin_layout Description
43550 \begin_inset space ~
43553 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43554 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43556 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43558 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43559 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43560 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43561 scanned for the input files.
43562 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43563 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43564 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43565 compilation may fail for some documents.
43568 \begin_layout Section
43572 \begin_layout Standard
43573 Here you can insert your
43582 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43584 \begin_inset space ~
43588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43590 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43594 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43597 \begin_layout Section
43599 \begin_inset Index idx
43602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43603 Language ! Settings
43609 \begin_inset Index idx
43612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43613 Settings ! Language
43621 \begin_layout Subsection
43623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43625 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43632 \begin_layout Description
43634 \begin_inset space ~
43638 \begin_inset space ~
43641 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43642 You can find its actual translation status here:
43643 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43645 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43652 \begin_layout Description
43654 \begin_inset space ~
43657 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43659 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43660 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43677 The most widespread language package is
43682 \begin_inset Index idx
43685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43686 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43691 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43692 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43693 alternative language package
43698 \begin_inset Index idx
43701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43702 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43707 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43708 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43714 The available selections are described in section
43715 \begin_inset space ~
43719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43721 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43728 \begin_layout Description
43730 \begin_inset space ~
43733 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
43734 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
43735 An example is the start command
43741 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43746 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43761 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43766 \begin_layout Description
43768 \begin_inset space ~
43776 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43777 command toggles the package on and off.
43780 \begin_layout Description
43782 \begin_inset space ~
43786 \begin_inset space ~
43789 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43793 \begin_layout Description
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43799 \begin_inset space ~
43802 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43803 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43804 used by all LaTeX-packages.
43805 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43812 \begin_layout Description
43814 \begin_inset space ~
43817 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43819 When this option is not set, the
43822 \begin_inset space ~
43827 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
43828 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
43831 \begin_inset space ~
43839 \begin_layout Description
43841 \begin_inset space ~
43847 \begin_inset space ~
43853 When it is not set, the
43856 \begin_inset space ~
43861 is set to the end of the document.
43864 \begin_layout Description
43866 \begin_inset space ~
43870 \begin_inset space ~
43873 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
43874 language will be underlined in blue.
43877 \begin_layout Description
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43883 \begin_inset space ~
43886 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
43887 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
43890 \begin_layout Description
43892 \begin_inset space ~
43895 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
43896 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
43897 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
43898 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
43901 \begin_layout Subsection
43905 \begin_layout Standard
43906 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
43907 \begin_inset space ~
43911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43913 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43920 \begin_layout Section
43924 \begin_layout Subsection
43928 \begin_layout Description
43930 \begin_inset space ~
43934 \begin_inset space ~
43937 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
43940 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43941 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43949 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
43952 \begin_layout Description
43954 \begin_inset space ~
43958 \begin_inset Index idx
43961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43968 \begin_inset Index idx
43971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43972 Settings ! Date format
43977 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
43978 \begin_inset Newline newline
43982 \begin_inset Flex URL
43985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43987 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
43993 \begin_inset Newline newline
43996 For example the format
43997 \begin_inset Newline newline
44001 \begin_inset Newline newline
44004 prints the date as day/month/year.
44007 \begin_layout Description
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44013 \begin_inset space ~
44016 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44019 \begin_layout Description
44021 \begin_inset space ~
44024 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44026 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44028 \begin_inset space ~
44034 For a detailed description see section
44036 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44041 \begin_inset space ~
44049 \begin_layout Subsection
44051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44058 \begin_inset Index idx
44061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44068 \begin_inset Index idx
44071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44080 \begin_layout Description
44082 \begin_inset space ~
44085 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44090 The name will be used when the
44095 \begin_inset Newline newline
44099 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44107 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44115 \begin_layout Description
44117 \begin_inset space ~
44120 command is the command LyX
44121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44128 LaTeX uses for printing.
44136 \begin_layout Description
44138 \begin_inset space ~
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44145 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44146 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44147 of the program that provides the
44154 \begin_layout Description
44156 \begin_inset space ~
44160 \begin_inset space ~
44164 \begin_inset space ~
44167 printer This option works only for the
44172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44184 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44185 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44188 \begin_layout Subsection
44193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44203 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44208 \begin_inset Index idx
44211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44220 \begin_layout Description
44222 \begin_inset space ~
44229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44237 \begin_inset space ~
44241 \begin_inset space ~
44244 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44249 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44270 are used for Cyrillic.
44271 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44284 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44285 LyX sets up in the background.
44286 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44289 \begin_layout Description
44291 \begin_inset space ~
44295 \begin_inset space ~
44298 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44303 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44306 \begin_layout Description
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44312 \begin_inset space ~
44316 \begin_inset space ~
44320 \begin_inset space ~
44323 options They only have an effect when the program
44327 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44330 \begin_layout Standard
44331 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44332 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44333 manuals of the applications.
44336 \begin_layout Description
44338 \begin_inset space ~
44341 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44342 \begin_inset space ~
44346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44348 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44355 \begin_layout Description
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44360 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44361 \begin_inset space ~
44365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44367 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44374 \begin_layout Description
44376 \begin_inset space ~
44379 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44386 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44393 \begin_layout Description
44398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44409 command Command for the program
44413 that is described in the section
44419 Additional Features
44424 \begin_layout Standard
44425 There are additionally the following options:
44428 \begin_layout Description
44430 \begin_inset space ~
44434 \begin_inset space ~
44438 \begin_inset space ~
44442 \begin_inset space ~
44446 \begin_inset space ~
44449 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44467 to separate folders.
44468 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44469 \begin_inset Index idx
44472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44479 \begin_inset Index idx
44482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44491 \begin_layout Description
44493 \begin_inset space ~
44497 \begin_inset space ~
44501 \begin_inset space ~
44505 \begin_inset space ~
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44513 \begin_inset space ~
44516 changes Removes all manually set
44522 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44523 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44525 \begin_inset space ~
44530 dialog when changing the document class.
44533 \begin_layout Section
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44539 \begin_inset Index idx
44542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44551 \begin_layout Subsection
44553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44555 name "sub:Converters"
44560 \begin_inset Index idx
44563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44572 \begin_layout Standard
44573 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44574 from one format to another.
44575 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44576 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44583 \begin_inset space ~
44588 field and press the
44593 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44597 \begin_inset space ~
44602 drop-down list, modify the
44606 field and press the
44613 \begin_layout Standard
44616 Converter File Cache
44622 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44624 Maximum Age (in days
44627 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44628 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44631 \begin_layout Standard
44632 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44633 definition, is described in the section
44644 \begin_layout Subsection
44646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44648 name "sec:File-Formats"
44653 \begin_inset Index idx
44656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44663 \begin_inset Index idx
44666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44675 \begin_layout Standard
44676 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44685 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44688 \begin_layout Standard
44689 You can also define the
44691 Default output format
44693 that is used when you use
44695 View, Update, View Master Document
44699 Update Master Document
44705 menu or the toolbar.
44708 \begin_layout Standard
44709 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44720 \begin_layout Standard
44721 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
44722 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44723 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44724 This is done by specifying a
44729 More about this is described in the section
44740 \begin_layout Chapter
44741 Units available in LyX
44742 \begin_inset Index idx
44745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44754 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44761 \begin_layout Standard
44763 \begin_inset space ~
44767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44769 reference "tab:Units"
44773 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
44776 \begin_layout Standard
44777 \begin_inset Float table
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44784 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44802 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 \begin_inset Tabular
44811 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
44812 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
44813 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44814 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44965 scaled point (65536
44966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45026 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45081 % of original image width
45088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45295 \begin_layout Chapter
45297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45299 name "chap:Credits"
45306 \begin_layout Standard
45307 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45308 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45311 \begin_layout Itemize
45314 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45317 \begin_layout Itemize
45323 \begin_layout Itemize
45329 \begin_layout Itemize
45335 \begin_layout Itemize
45341 \begin_layout Itemize
45347 \begin_layout Itemize
45353 \begin_layout Itemize
45359 \begin_layout Itemize
45362 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45365 \begin_layout Itemize
45371 \begin_layout Itemize
45377 \begin_layout Itemize
45383 \begin_layout Itemize
45389 \begin_layout Itemize
45395 \begin_layout Itemize
45401 \begin_layout Itemize
45407 \begin_layout Itemize
45413 \begin_layout Itemize
45415 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45424 \begin_layout Standard
45425 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45428 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45435 \begin_layout Bibliography
45436 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45437 LatexCommand bibitem
45444 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45447 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45452 \begin_inset Newline newline
45456 \begin_inset Flex URL
45459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45461 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45469 \begin_layout Bibliography
45470 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45471 LatexCommand bibitem
45472 key "latexcompanion"
45476 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45478 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45481 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45484 \begin_layout Bibliography
45485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45486 LatexCommand bibitem
45491 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45494 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45497 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45500 \begin_layout Bibliography
45501 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45502 LatexCommand bibitem
45509 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45512 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45515 \begin_layout Bibliography
45516 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45517 LatexCommand bibitem
45529 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45532 \begin_layout Bibliography
45533 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45534 LatexCommand bibitem
45540 \begin_inset Newline newline
45544 \begin_inset Flex URL
45547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45549 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45557 \begin_layout Bibliography
45558 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45559 LatexCommand bibitem
45565 \begin_inset Newline newline
45569 \begin_inset Flex URL
45572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45574 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45582 \begin_layout Bibliography
45583 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45584 LatexCommand bibitem
45590 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45592 name "Documentation"
45593 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45602 \begin_inset Newline newline
45606 \begin_inset Flex URL
45609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45611 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45619 \begin_layout Bibliography
45620 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45621 LatexCommand bibitem
45627 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45629 name "Documentation"
45630 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45634 how to use the program
45639 \begin_inset Newline newline
45643 \begin_inset Flex URL
45646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45648 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45656 \begin_layout Bibliography
45657 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45658 LatexCommand bibitem
45664 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45666 name "Documentation"
45667 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45676 \begin_inset Newline newline
45680 \begin_inset Flex URL
45683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45685 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45693 \begin_layout Bibliography
45694 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45695 LatexCommand bibitem
45701 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45703 name "Documentation"
45704 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45713 \begin_inset Newline newline
45717 \begin_inset Flex URL
45720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45722 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
45730 \begin_layout Bibliography
45731 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45732 LatexCommand bibitem
45738 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45740 name "Documentation"
45741 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
45745 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
45746 \begin_inset Newline newline
45750 \begin_inset Flex URL
45753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45755 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
45763 \begin_layout Bibliography
45764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45765 LatexCommand bibitem
45771 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45773 name "Documentation"
45774 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
45778 of the LaTeX-package
45783 \begin_inset Index idx
45786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45787 LaTeX-packages ! caption
45793 \begin_inset Newline newline
45797 \begin_inset Flex URL
45800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45802 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
45810 \begin_layout Bibliography
45811 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45812 LatexCommand bibitem
45818 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45820 name "Documentation"
45821 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
45825 of the LaTeX-package
45830 \begin_inset Index idx
45833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45834 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
45840 \begin_inset Newline newline
45844 \begin_inset Flex URL
45847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45849 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
45857 \begin_layout Bibliography
45858 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45859 LatexCommand bibitem
45865 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45867 name "Documentation"
45868 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
45872 of the LaTeX-package
45877 \begin_inset Index idx
45880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45881 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
45887 \begin_inset Newline newline
45891 \begin_inset Flex URL
45894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
45904 \begin_layout Bibliography
45905 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45906 LatexCommand bibitem
45912 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45914 name "Documentation"
45915 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
45919 of the LaTeX-package
45924 \begin_inset Index idx
45927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
45934 \begin_inset Newline newline
45938 \begin_inset Flex URL
45941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
45951 \begin_layout Bibliography
45952 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45953 LatexCommand bibitem
45959 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45961 name "Documentation"
45962 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
45966 of the LaTeX-package
45971 \begin_inset Index idx
45974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45975 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
45981 \begin_inset Newline newline
45985 \begin_inset Flex URL
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45990 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
45998 \begin_layout Bibliography
45999 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46000 LatexCommand bibitem
46006 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46008 name "Documentation"
46009 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46013 of the LaTeX-package
46018 \begin_inset Index idx
46021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46022 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46028 \begin_inset Newline newline
46032 \begin_inset Flex URL
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46037 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46045 \begin_layout Bibliography
46046 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46047 LatexCommand bibitem
46053 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46055 name "Documentation"
46056 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46060 of the LaTeX-package
46065 \begin_inset Index idx
46068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46069 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46075 \begin_inset Newline newline
46079 \begin_inset Flex URL
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46084 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46092 \begin_layout Bibliography
46093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46094 LatexCommand bibitem
46100 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46103 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46107 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46108 \begin_inset Newline newline
46112 \begin_inset Flex URL
46115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46117 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46125 \begin_layout Bibliography
46126 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46127 LatexCommand bibitem
46133 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46136 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46140 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46141 \begin_inset Newline newline
46145 \begin_inset Flex URL
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46150 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46158 \begin_layout Bibliography
46159 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46160 LatexCommand bibitem
46166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46169 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46173 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46174 \begin_inset Newline newline
46178 \begin_inset Flex URL
46181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46183 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46191 \begin_layout Bibliography
46192 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46193 LatexCommand bibitem
46199 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46202 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46206 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46207 \begin_inset Newline newline
46211 \begin_inset Flex URL
46214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46216 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46224 \begin_layout Bibliography
46225 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46226 LatexCommand bibitem
46232 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46235 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46239 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46240 \begin_inset Newline newline
46244 \begin_inset Flex URL
46247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46249 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46257 \begin_layout Bibliography
46258 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46259 LatexCommand bibitem
46265 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46268 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46272 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46273 \begin_inset Newline newline
46277 \begin_inset Flex URL
46280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46282 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46290 \begin_layout Bibliography
46291 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46292 LatexCommand bibitem
46298 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46301 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46305 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46306 \begin_inset Newline newline
46310 \begin_inset Flex URL
46313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46315 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46323 \begin_layout Bibliography
46324 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46325 LatexCommand bibitem
46331 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46334 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46338 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46339 \begin_inset Newline newline
46343 \begin_inset Flex URL
46346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46348 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46356 \begin_layout Bibliography
46357 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46358 LatexCommand bibitem
46364 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46367 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46371 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46372 \begin_inset Newline newline
46376 \begin_inset Flex URL
46379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46381 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46389 \begin_layout Bibliography
46390 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46391 LatexCommand bibitem
46397 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46400 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46404 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46405 \begin_inset Newline newline
46409 \begin_inset Flex URL
46412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46414 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46422 \begin_layout Bibliography
46423 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46424 LatexCommand bibitem
46430 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46433 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46437 about new features in
46442 \begin_inset Newline newline
46446 \begin_inset Flex URL
46449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46451 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46459 \begin_layout Standard
46460 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46494 \begin_inset Note Note
46497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46504 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46505 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46506 bibliography is the second one:
46514 \begin_layout Standard
46515 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46516 LatexCommand bibtex
46517 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46518 options "biblio/alphadin"
46525 \begin_layout Standard
46526 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46529 \begin_layout Standard
46530 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46531 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46537 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46538 LatexCommand printindex